irt310 master data in sap for retail

397
IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail SAP for Industries - SAP for Retail Date Training Center Instructors Education Website Participant Handbook Course Version: 2006 Q2 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) Material Number: 50079220 An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Upload: kousik-mukherjee

Post on 28-Nov-2014

2.870 views

Category:

Documents


132 download

DESCRIPTION

Master Data in SAP for Retail

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310Master Data in SAP for Retail

SAP for Industries - SAP for Retail

Date

Training Center

Instructors

Education Website

Participant HandbookCourse Version: 2006 Q2Course Duration: 5 Day(s)Material Number: 50079220

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Page 2: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Copyright

Copyright © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Trademarks

� Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® areregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

� IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®,S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

� ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.� INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered

trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.� UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.� Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,

VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarksof Citrix Systems, Inc.

� HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, WorldWide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

� JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.� JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for

technology invented and implemented by Netscape.� SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP

EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.comare trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countriesall over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks oftheir respective companies.

Disclaimer

THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLYDISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTSCONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANYKIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOSTPROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDEDSOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g200610144282

Page 3: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

About This HandbookThis handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of thiscourse, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic ConventionsAmerican English is the standard used in this handbook. The followingtypographic conventions are also used.

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. Theseinclude field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as wellas menu names, paths, and options.

Also used for cross-references to other documentationboth internal (in this documentation) and external (inother locations, such as SAPNet).

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles ofgraphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These includereport names, program names, transaction codes, tablenames, and individual key words of a programminglanguage, when surrounded by body text, for exampleSELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory namesand their paths, messages, names of variables andparameters, and passages of the source text of aprogram.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters thatyou enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that youreplace these words and characters with appropriateentries.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii

Page 4: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

About This Handbook IRT310

Icons in Body TextThe following icons are used in this handbook.

Icon Meaning

For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point

Exception or caution

Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor'spresentation.

iv © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 5: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

ContentsCourse Overview ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Course Goals .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viiCourse Objectives ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Organizational Structures in Retail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Unit 2: Business Partner ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Customer... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Vendor .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Unit 3: Sites ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sites ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Site Maintenance .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Unit 4: Article Groupings ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Classification .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Merchandise Categories .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories ... . . . .109Article Hierarchy.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Unit 5: Assortment Management..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Assortment.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136Listing Procedures ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Assortment List.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Unit 6: Single Articles..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Creating Articles.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Article Fast Entry... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224PRICAT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Article List .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Configuring the Article Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Article Discontinuation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Characteristics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301Creating a Generic Article ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Prepack .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v

Page 6: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Contents IRT310

Additionals .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Unit 8: Structured Articles ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Structured Articles ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Unit 9: Logistical Variants ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Logistical Variants.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

vi © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 7: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Course OverviewYour company has decided to implement SAP Retail, and you are responsible formaintaining and optimizing master data.

Employees should - as far as possible - work efficiently and without errorsoccurring. Therefore, you create an optimal reference concept.

The article master is also configured in different ways for different groupsof employees, depending on their requirements. This means that individualemployees can see and process only the data that is relevant to them.

Target AudienceThis course is intended for the following audiences:

� Project team members� SAP consultants

Course PrerequisitesRequired Knowledge

� Basic knowledge of retailing� SAPIRT Function Overview in SAP for Retail

Recommended Knowledge

� None.

Course GoalsThis course will prepare you to:

� Maintain and configure the specific SAP Retail master data� Use and discover the advantages of the reference concept

Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, you will be able to:

� Describe the organizational structures in SAP Retail and know where theseorganizational structures can be set up

� Maintain general Retail master data and configure it according to yourrequirements

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii

Page 8: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Course Overview IRT310

� Describe the SAP Retail reference concept and use it according to yourrequirements

SAP Software Component InformationThe information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Componentsand releases:

viii © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 9: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1Organizational Structures in Retail

Unit OverviewThis unit explains that the organizational structures and their assignments, whichare supported by SAP Retail, are a basic prerequisite for working in the SAPRetail system.

It describes additional controls that must be maintained for the Industry SolutionSAP for Retail at organizational structure level.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which aresupported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail

� In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizationalstructures

Unit ContentsLesson: Organizational Structures in Retail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Exercise 1: Organizational Units .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1

Page 10: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which aresupported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail

� In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizationalstructures

Business ExampleYou have decided to implement the Industry Solution SAP for Retail. You haveanalyzed your current organizational structures and discussed mapping them ontothe corresponding structures in SAP Retail. You now create the organizationalunits and their assignments in SAP Retail.

SAP Retail OverviewSAP Retail is a complete system that supports competitive assortment strategies,variable sales technologies and corresponding site categories, as well asconsumer-oriented distribution logistics when dealing with consumer products.It provides all important functions you need to map your business processes ina retail company.

The aim is to completely map the value chain from the consumer to the vendor,and to optimize the various functions and control processes in the flow of goodsand information between vendors, retail and consumers.

Organizational StructuresFlexible organizational units in SAP Retail make it possible to map even complexorganizational structures. A large number of organizational units makes it possibleto map the legal and organizational structure of a retail company from differentbusiness viewpoints. Many organizational units are also data retention levels,which means that, when there are several organizational units like this, differentdata can be stored for each one.

SAP Retail is client-capable. A client is a corporate group that can subdivide intosubsidiaries. In SAP Retail, organizational units can be set up for the individualdepartments of a company.

2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 11: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

This means that the organizational units reflect the subdivision of a companyfrom a business viewpoint in SAP Retail.

Figure 1: Organizational Structures

The variable organizational structures in the SAP system offer the followingadvantages:

� The flexibility to be able to map complex company structures� Separate logistical views (purchasing, sales and distribution), the managerial

accounting view and the external accounting view� The option of cross-company-code processing

Organizational structures are maintained in Customizing (Implementation Guide).They must be created individually and then assigned to each other.

The most important organizational units in SAP Retail are listed below.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 3

Page 12: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

Financial Accounting and Controlling

Figure 2: Organizational Structures in Financial Accounting and Controlling

The client is a corporate group that can subdivide into subsidiaries.

The controlling area is an organizational unit of the internal accounting, whichsubdivides the company from the controlling viewpoint. One or more companycodes can be assigned to a controlling area, if they have the same chart of accounts.

The company code is an organizational unit of the external accounting, whichsubdivides the company from the financial accounting viewpoint. You can set upseveral company codes in one client to keep several independent accounts at thesame time. You must, however, set up at least one company code in each client.

The company code is the accounting unit to draw up the financial statement. Thiscan be, but does not have to be, identical to the controlling area.

In a central organization, generally a maximum of one uniform chart of accounts isdefined at corporate group level and this is then valid for all company codes. In adecentralized organization, the chart of accounts is defined at company code level.All the company codes that belong to a cross-company-code cost accounting mustuse the same operational chart of accounts.

The company is defined from the controlling viewpoint using the controlling area,operating concern and profit center. The controlling area structures a companyfrom the controlling viewpoint.

4 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 13: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Figure 3: Organizational Structures in Financial Accounting

The company is defined from the accounting viewpoint using the company codeand business area.

A company code is an independent accounting unit in the sense of a legallyindependent company. It is the central organizational element of the financialaccounting. In Retail, the entire company can represent a company code, but adistribution chain or even each individual site can be displayed as a companycode too.

In a client, you can set up several business areas, which can be assigned to anaccount in all company codes that are defined in this client. At business area level,you can carry out settlements and profit and loss statements for internal purposes.

The business area is an organizational unit of the accounting, which corresponds toa defined activity area of the company or an area of responsibility in the company.Business areas enable you to structure operating levels according to their businesscontents. This means that distribution chains or individual sites, for example, canbe displayed as business areas. For a consistent document entry, it makes sense forbusiness areas in all company codes to have the same meaning.

Each valuation-relevant transaction creates a financial accounting document,which lists the G/L accounts posted to and the details of the posting.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 5

Page 14: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

Figure 4: Organizational Structures: Valuation

A site can be a store, a distribution center, or a production location. In SAP Retail,the site is the selling and inventory management organizational unit. Every sitebelongs to just one company code.

Stocks are updated by goods movements on both a quantity and value basis. Therelevant G/L accounts in accounting, which are affected by this transaction, aredetermined and posted to via automatic account determination.

A valuation area is the organizational unit for value-based inventory management.In SAP Retail, the valuation area must always correspond to a site. Inventorymanagement on a value-only basis is carried out at valuation area level.

Every site is a valuation area in SAP Retail. This is already determined when thesystem is set up as a Retail system and it is unchangeable. The valuation area doesnot appear on the screen, it is controlled internally.

6 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 15: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Logistics

Figure 5: Organizational structures in Purchasing

A purchasing organization procures articles for several sites and negotiatespurchase conditions with the vendors. A complete purchasing transactionis managed by one purchasing organization. Authorizations for masterdata maintenance and purchasing management are assigned per purchasingorganization.

A purchasing organization can be assigned to one company code. If this is thecase, the purchasing organization can only purchase for sites that belong to thesame company code.

A reference for one purchasing organization can also be applied to anotherpurchasing organization, so that the conditions, contracts and purchasing inforecords can be used together.

A purchasing group is similar to a purchasing department in that it consists of oneor more buyers. Purchasing groups are responsible for maintaining master dataand control data, and for the operative purchasing management. Authorizationscan be assigned to each purchasing group individually. The purchasing group isnot a data retention level.

A purchasing area can be used as a connecting link between the purchasingorganization and the purchasing group. It is used as an additional hierarchy levelduring the evaluation. However, it is not a data retention level. In order to map thisconnecting link, one purchasing area is assigned to a combination of a purchasingorganization and a purchasing group in Customizing.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 7

Page 16: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

Figure 6: Organizational Structures: Inventory Management

To be able to keep track of the goods flow in the company, article stocks must bemanaged on a quantity basis in the system.

In SAP Retail, the site is the selling and inventory-managing unit. A site can be astore or a distribution center.

The storage location is an organizational unit that makes it possible to differentiatebetween stocks in a site. In a distribution center, a storage location can mapvarious logistical functions (for example, a cross-docking storage location, alean-WM-managed storage location). Usually a store is assigned to one storagelocation, but additional storage locations can also be managed for outdoor stock(for example, camping articles, furniture).

You can differentiate between stocks of an article in a storage location on the basisof batches. It is also possible to maintain expiration dates.

8 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 17: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Figure 7: Inventory Management in the Distribution Center

WM: Warehouse Management

MM: Material Management

Transactions that cause a change in stock and the resulting stock updates areentered in the system in real time, enabling physical stock levels to be mirroredexactly in the inventory management.

There are three different organizational structure options in a distribution center:inventory management on the storage location (MM-managed storage location),inventory management on the storage location with a storage location that ismanaged by a lean WM, and inventory management on the storage bin with aWM-managed storage location = Warehouse Management system.

For complex distribution centers, theWarehouse Management system allowsstock to be differentiated up to storage bin level. This means that structures, suchas those of a high rack storage area, can be displayed.

The Warehouse Management system is integrated into the whole system byconnecting a storage location to a warehouse number. If, for example, a goodsreceipt is posted to the inventory management, an action to put away the goodsis triggered in the Warehouse Management. A complex warehouse structure ismanaged under a warehouse number.

Various partial warehouses, the organizational and technical attributes of whichdiffer, are defined as storage types, such as the goods receipt area, goods issuearea, high rack storage area and picking bin. The individual storage bins aredefined in a storage type. They are the smallest organizational units that can be

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 9

Page 18: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

called in the system. They can be called using coordinates such as 05-04-03 foraisle 05, stack 04, level 03. When an article appears on a storage bin, it is flaggedas quant.

Transport orders are used to transport the articles within the warehouse (forexample, from the goods receipt area to the storage bin).

The LeanWM is a warehouse structure with which transport orders can be used aspick orders, even in simply structured warehouses. Transport orders can be createdfor deliveries (excluding goods receipts or goods issue), even if storage bins arenot managed in the WM. Inventory management occurs at storage location levelonly. The system does not use quants to update the stock data at storage bin level.

We recommend using the Lean WM if you want to pick deliveries in a warehousethat you do not manage with the Warehouse Management system.

Figure 8: Organizational Structures in Sales

The sales organization is an organizational unit of the logistics, which subdividesthe company according to the requirements of sales and distribution.

Every sales organization represents a selling unit in the legal sense and is, forexample, responsible for product liability and any customer's rights of recourse. Itis also responsible for the sales and distribution of the article, and negotiates salesconditions. You can use sales organizations to divide your market into regions, forexample, into countries. A complete business transaction in sales and distributionis always managed in a sales organization.

10 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 19: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

In SAP Retail, a sales organization can be assigned to a purchasing organization.This means that the hierarchy creation that is displayed in the figure may beenforced. For statistical purposes, this may be of interest. In some cases, bothterms are identical.

A reference to another sales organization can be created for one sales organizationat sales document type level. The sales document types of the referenced salesorganization are then used.

In combination with the distribution channel, the sales organization forms adistribution chain. Sales and distribution uses different distribution channels interms of distribution lanes or distribution channels. Possible distribution channelsinclude, for example, sales to the consumer via various store chains or mail order.The distribution channel is assigned to a sales organization.

In SAP Retail, the distribution chain category of a distribution chaindetermines,if it will be used to supply sites or wholesale customers respectively, or to supplyconsumers.

References to other distribution chains in the same sales organization can becreated for a distribution chain. This means that customer and article master data,sales document types and condition types can be accessed from the distributionchain that is being referenced.

A division must be defined, although SAP Retail does not use it in the retailfunctions. Together with the division, a distribution chain forms a sales area. Ifjust one division is created, then the sales area is functionally almost identical tothe distribution chain for retail.

Copy Function

Figure 9: Organizational Structures: Copy Function

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 11

Page 20: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

In the SAP System, you have the option of processing existing organizationalstructures. The following functions are available:

� Copy:

Use this function if you want to create a new organizational unit and want touse the existing settings as a template.

� Delete:

Use this function if you want to delete an existing organizational unit withall dependent entries.

� Check:

Use this function to check all the settings for an existing organizational unit.

Be careful to delete or copy only the system settings (in Customizing). Masterdata is not included in this process.

If you only want to process mandatory activities in the system settings, then youmust use the copy function to create the new organizational units. This is the onlyway you can make all the necessary system settings.

12 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 21: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Exercise 1: Organizational Units

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Find organizational structures in the Implementation Guide (IMG)

Business ExampleA new employee needs to become familiar with the most important elements ofyour company structure quickly. Show the structures in the SAP system to thenew employee.

Task 1:Display the existing organizational structures in the Implementation Guide (IMG).

1. View the definition and assignments of some organizational levels in theImplementation Guide:

2. Where can you find the definition of a company code in the ImplementationGuide? Specify the menu path.

________________________________________________

3. For the duration of the course you will use R300 as your company code.What is the name of this company code?

______________________________________________________

Which currency and language are set by default in company code R300?

______________________________________________________

Task 2:You now work more closely with the company�s organizational units. Check theexisting assignments of sales organization RG10.

1. Which organizational units form a distribution chain?

______________________________________________________

2. What distribution chains are there for the sales organization RG10?

______________________________________________________

3. To which company code is the sales organization RG10 assigned?

______________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 13

Page 22: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

Solution 1: Organizational UnitsTask 1:Display the existing organizational structures in the Implementation Guide (IMG).

1. View the definition and assignments of some organizational levels in theImplementation Guide:

a) Tools→ AcceleratedSAP→ IMG→ Execute Project, Goto→ SAPReference IMG

2. Where can you find the definition of a company code in the ImplementationGuide? Specify the menu path.

________________________________________________

a) IMG: Enterprise Structure→ Definition→ Financial Accounting→ Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code

b) Edit Company Code Data

3. For the duration of the course you will use R300 as your company code.What is the name of this company code?

______________________________________________________

Which currency and language are set by default in company code R300?

______________________________________________________

a) Select R300 : Goto→ Details

CompanyName

IDES Retail INC US

Currency USDLanguage EN

Task 2:You now work more closely with the company�s organizational units. Check theexisting assignments of sales organization RG10.

1. Which organizational units form a distribution chain?

______________________________________________________

a) A distribution chain is formed from the sales organization anddistribution channel organizational units.

2. What distribution chains are there for the sales organization RG10?

Continued on next page

14 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 23: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

______________________________________________________

a) IMG: Enterprise Structure→ Assignment→ Sales and Distribution→ Assign distribution channel to sales organization

R1 Stores USR5 Distribution USR7 Internet/Catalog US

3. To which company code is the sales organization RG10 assigned?

______________________________________________________

a) IMG: Enterprise Structure→ Assignment→ Sales and Distribution→ Assign sales organization to company code

Sales organization RG10 is assigned to company code R300.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 15

Page 24: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are

supported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail� In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizational

structures

16 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 25: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are

supported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail� In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizational

structures

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 17

Page 26: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

18 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 27: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2Business Partner

Unit OverviewThis unit describes the structure of business partner master records, explainsthe task of the account group, and specifies the options for the maintenance ofdifferent purchasing data for the vendor.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Name the different customer categories� Describe the structure of a customer master record� Describe the structure of a vendor master record� Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

Unit ContentsLesson: Customer ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Lesson: Vendor .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Exercise 2: Vendor .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 19

Page 28: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

Lesson: Customer

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the different customer categories� Describe the structure of a customer master record

Business ExampleYou deliver goods to new customers and create their customer master records sothat the delivery and payroll processes run smoothly in the system.

Customer Master Data

Figure 10: Customer: Definition

20 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 29: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Customer

Figure 11: Customer: Master Data

As a customer is regarded as a business partner of the company in financialaccounting, the customer master record is used by both sales and financialaccounting. Customers are classified as debitors in financial accounting.

Every site has a customer master record.

Figure 12: Customer: Business Partner

�Business partner� is an SAP term.

A business partner is a person or organization with which you do business.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 21

Page 30: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

In the SAP system, business partners are defined according to roles that they fulfilland according to requirements that they apply to you. Examples include:

� Contact person, for example, someone with whom you want to keep regularcontact (for example, management)

� Personnel, for example, sales employees or employees who you representat trade fairs

When you are defining a business partner, you should remember who expectspayment from you (for example, a commission or fee) and who receivesdocuments from you (for example, forms, letters or other messages).

When you are creating customer master records, you must create a master recordfor a sold-to party. When you create these mandatory roles, the SAP systemautomatically completes the partner role view of this master record with entriesfor the ship-to party, bill-to party and payer. The SAP system defaults the sameperson for all four partner roles. You can overwrite these default values.

Figure 13: Customer: Customer Account Groups

The account group is a template for creating customer master records.

The account group determines:

� The data fields in the master record that are either hidden or displayed, andare either required entry or optional entry fields

� The number range for the customer of the sold-to party or the ship-to partyand so on

� A number of other control elements

22 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 31: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Customer

Example:

A customer master record for a ship-to party (created with account group 0002)contains certain views and data fields. This master record requires informationrelevant to shipping. All the fields relevant to billing are hidden.

Account groups are contained in the standard system. If required, you can createadditional account groups.

Figure 14: Organizational Structures in Wholesale (Example)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 23

Page 32: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the different customer categories� Describe the structure of a customer master record

24 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 33: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Lesson: Vendor

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the structure of a vendor master record� Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

Business ExampleFrom now on you will be receiving goods from a new vendor and you have tocreate a master record for this vendor in the system.

You determine which articles are delivered from your new vendor and under whatconditions they are delivered.

Vendor Master Data

Figure 15: Vendor: Definition

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 25

Page 34: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

Figure 16: Vendor: Master Data

The data in the vendor master record is subdivided into three categories:

� General Data:

This includes the address and banking details of the creditor. The data isvalid on a client-wide basis. You will also find the procurement monitoringfields here.

� Purchasing Data:

This includes the purchase order currency, incoterms and various controldata of the creditor. This data is maintained for the relevant purchasingorganization. You can also enter alternative data that is only valid for specificsites or for vendor sub-ranges.

� Financial Accounting Data:

This includes, for example, the number of the reconciliation account andthe payment methods for the automatic payment transactions. Financialaccounting data is maintained at company code level.

A vendor master record may be blocked, if, for example, the quality of theproducts supplied by this vendor is substandard. You can use the source list toblock a vendor for a single article/SKU.

26 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 35: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Figure 17: Vendor: Purchasing Data

These are vendor-related entries, which you can maintain for every purchasingorganization in your client. It concerns data that is important for purchasing, suchas purchasing data and partner functions.

In addition to maintaining the data that is valid for the entire purchasingorganization, you can also maintain data for a specific site and/or vendorsub-range in the purchasing data and partner function screens. This may include,for example, terms of payment or Incoterms that differ from the terms of paymentor Incoterms in the purchasing organization. You can create this alternative datafor the vendor at the following data retention levels:

� Vendor sub-range (VSR)� Site� Vendor sub-range/site

The data retention level from which the system defaults data, for example, in apurchase order, is determined in the following sequence:

1. Vendor sub-range/site/purchasing organization2. Vendor sub-range/purchasing organization3. Site/purchasing organization level4. Purchasing organization

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 27

Page 36: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

Figure 18: Vendor: Vendor Sub-Range

Vendor sub-ranges are specified by vendors. Reasons for creating sub-rangesinclude, for example:

� Different conditions� Different addresses� Different control data for requirements planning and purchase orders

In the vendor master, the purchasing data and partner roles can be createdseparately for each sub-range.

The link between vendor and article is created using the purchasing info record.The article maintenance automatically creates and maintains the purchasing inforecord. Among other things, information is created about conditions, terms ofdelivery and payment agreements. Purchasing info records can provide defaultvalues when the purchase order is being created.

An article is assigned to a sub-range in the purchasing view of the article(purchasing info record). A sorting number can also be assigned, to sort thearticles in a purchase order in the standard vendor way.

28 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 37: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Figure 19: Vendor: Supply Regions

In the vendor master purchasing data, you can choose which supply regions avendor supplies.

Each site can be assigned to one supply region.

The system checks the supply regions of the vendor master when a purchaseorder is created for a site that is assigned to a supply region. If the vendor is notresponsible for that particular region, the system issues a warning message.

If supply regions have been created in the vendor master, the information is takeninto account in the supply source determination of the purchasing.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 29

Page 38: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

Figure 20: Vendor: Partner Roles

Partner Functions

For certain operative functions, you can use partner functions to create a linkbetween the vendor and other credit-side master records. The correspondingpartner functions must be defined in these master records.

The partner functions created in the vendor master can be defaulted and used inpurchase orders and contracts.

Vendor Master Records:

� Only one vendor master record is required if a vendor is also the orderrecipient, vendor, invoicing party and payee.

� Several vendor master records are required if these functions are distributedto different locations or companies. They are linked to each other by partnerfunctions.

You can enter a contact person for each partner function.

Partner functions allow you to assign different locations or companies to a vendormaster record.

Partner functions refer to different functions that a particular vendor may havein the business relationship with you.

30 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 39: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Figure 21: Vendor: Vendor Account Groups

The account group is a template for creating vendor master records.

The account group determines:

� The data fields in the master record that are either hidden or displayed, andare either required entry or optional entry fields

� The number range for the vendor master

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 31

Page 40: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

32 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 41: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Exercise 2: Vendor

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain vendor data� Find the Customizing settings that you require

Business ExampleThe vendor Northern Milk offers you better conditions if you purchase its wholerange of yoghurts. You create a vendor sub-range for these articles and maintainthe relevant purchasing data in the vendor master.

Task 1:The vendor master record already exists in the system under the numberR1TV03##. Familiarize yourself with the vendor data.

1. Display all data of vendor R1TV03## (Display→ Central). The companycode is R300, and the responsible purchasing organization is also R300 too.Select all views (except for the withholding tax view).

2. In which country and city is the vendor?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

3. What is the language setting for the vendor?

______________________________________________________

4. Find out which partner functions are still assigned to the vendor in additionto the mandatory �Vendor� function.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Task 2:You want to create a new sub-range for selected articles of vendor R1TV03##.

1. Find out with which account group the vendor R1TV03## was created.

______________________________________________________

2. In Customizing, check that you can create purchasing data for this accountgroup at vendor sub-range level.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 33

Page 42: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

3. In the Purchasing Data of the vendor, create a new vendor sub-range GR##with the description �Yoghurt�.

Hint: To do this, choose Vendor→ Change

Task 3:For articles from the Yoghurt sub-range, the vendor named a certain seller, whois the contact person for this article. You now want to create this informationin the system.

1. Create alternative data for the Yoghurt vendor sub-range.

2. On what other levels can you create alternative data?

_________________________________________________

3. You select your sub-range GR## and maintain the following alternativepurchasing data: The responsible seller for the article of the VSR isMrSmith and his telephone number is 089/23046-7. You want to specify thepurchasing group R30 as a default when creating the article. The planneddelivery time is 3 days.

4. Save the changes you have made to the vendor.

34 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 43: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Solution 2: VendorTask 1:The vendor master record already exists in the system under the numberR1TV03##. Familiarize yourself with the vendor data.

1. Display all data of vendor R1TV03## (Display→ Central). The companycode is R300, and the responsible purchasing organization is also R300 too.Select all views (except for the withholding tax view).

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Vendor Data→ Edit Vendors→ Vendor→ Display→ Central

Vendor R1TV03##Company Code R300Purch. Organization R300

b) Select all boxes (except for Withholding tax) and choose Enter

2. In which country and city is the vendor?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) Go to the Address view, and the Street Address subscreen

Country USACity Town

3. What is the language setting for the vendor?

______________________________________________________

a) Go to the Address view, and the Communication subscreen

Language English

4. Find out which partner functions are still assigned to the vendor in additionto the mandatory �Vendor� function.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) Goto→ Purchasing org.data→ Partner functions

Other partner functions are Ordering Address and Invoicing Party.Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 35

Page 44: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

Task 2:You want to create a new sub-range for selected articles of vendor R1TV03##.

1. Find out with which account group the vendor R1TV03## was created.

______________________________________________________

a) Extras→ Administrative data

The vendor was created with the account group 0001 Vendor.

2. In Customizing, check that you can create purchasing data for this accountgroup at vendor sub-range level.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Business Partner→ Vendors→ Control→ Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

b) Select group 0001

c) Choose Details

In the Data Retent. Levels: Purchasing subscreen, the Vendorsub-range relevant checkbox is selected, which means that data can becreated at this level.

Do not change this selection.

Continued on next page

36 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 45: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

3. In the Purchasing Data of the vendor, create a new vendor sub-range GR##with the description �Yoghurt�.

Hint: To do this, choose Vendor→ Change

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Vendor Data→ Edit Vendors→ Vendor→ Change→ Central

Vendor R1TV03##Company Code R300Purch. Organization R300

b) Select the Purchasing data checkbox and chooseEnter

c) In the Purchasing data view: choose Extras→ Vendor Sub-ranges

Sub-range GR##

VSR description Yogurt

d) Select the green arrow to return to the purchasing data

Task 3:For articles from the Yoghurt sub-range, the vendor named a certain seller, whois the contact person for this article. You now want to create this informationin the system.

1. Create alternative data for the Yoghurt vendor sub-range.

a) Choose Alternative data

b) Answer the query with YES

2. On what other levels can you create alternative data?

_________________________________________________

a) Alternative data can also be maintained at site level.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 37

Page 46: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 2: Business Partner IRT310

3. You select your sub-range GR## and maintain the following alternativepurchasing data: The responsible seller for the article of the VSR isMrSmith and his telephone number is 089/23046-7. You want to specify thepurchasing group R30 as a default when creating the article. The planneddelivery time is 3 days.

a)

Sub-range GR##

b) In the Alternative Data subscreen, select the Purchasing Datacheckbox and choose Enter

Vendor Mr Smith

Telephone number 089/23046-7

Purchasing group R30

Planned Delivery Time 3

4. Save the changes you have made to the vendor.

a) Choose Vendor→ Save

38 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 47: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Vendor

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the structure of a vendor master record� Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 39

Page 48: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Name the different customer categories� Describe the structure of a customer master record� Describe the structure of a vendor master record� Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

40 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 49: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3Sites

Unit OverviewThis unit describes the concept of the site profile and the corresponding referencesites, specifies how sites can be subdivided, explains the department store/shopconcept and the space management function, and describes how blocking reasonsare set and how they work.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Describe the structure of sites� Name the various site categories� Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs

to the profile� Create a site� List the ways you can subdivide sites� Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work� Describe the structure of a layout concept� Explain the space management function� Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

Unit ContentsLesson: Sites .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Exercise 3: Sites.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Lesson: Site Maintenance ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Exercise 4: Creating a Site... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Exercise 5: Department Store and Shop Maintenance.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Lesson: Layout .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Exercise 6: Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 41

Page 50: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Lesson: Sites

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the structure of sites� Name the various site categories� Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs

to the profile

Business ExampleYou plan on changing the product presentation of your stores. All your company'sstores should look the same to customers and should carry the same merchandisecategories and articles.

The store is undergoing renovation and will have to close temporarily.

The Structure of Sites

Figure 22: Sites: Basic Categories

42 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 51: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Sites

Figure 23: Sites: Site and Distribution Chain Categories

The distribution chain category describes the logistical function of a distributionchain. In retail, a distinction is made between consumer distribution chains anddistribution chains that are delivered by distribution centers.

In SAP Retail, a distinction is also made between two site categories:

� Distribution centers that provide goods for other sites or customers� Stores that present merchandise and sell it to consumers

A site is always a combination of the site master and the customer master.

� The site master is required as it is an inventory-management organizationalunit with own requirements planning.

� A site is also a customer as sales functions, such as deliveries and billing, arecarried out for it from a central viewpoint.

� A distribution center (DC) is also a vendor as it supplies other sites withmerchandise. A distribution center delivers merchandise to stores of oneor more distribution chains.

A distribution center has to be assigned to a distribution chain.

A store is always assigned to a specific distribution chain and may be supplied bydistribution centers via several distribution chains.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 43

Page 52: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Figure 24: Sites: Structure

As a site is also always a customer in the SAP System, all the customer functionscan be used. In the site profile in Customizing, you can choose to hide functions.

The following can be partner functions of a site:

� Sold-to party� Ship-to party� Bill-to party� Payer

One storage location is assigned to each store for inventory management.Distribution centers can have more than one storage location. The storage locationprovides a link to the Warehouse Management System.

A store can be subdivided into departments according to retail business aspects. Adepartment can be defined for each store and merchandise category. Departmentscan be assigned to a receiving point.

One of the unloading points can be assigned to each receiving point.

The merchant ID, which you can assign to a store, is used to settle credit card sales(for example, American Express, Visa Card) with the relevant clearing houses.

You can also assign time and merchandise category-related supplying sites to astore.

44 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 53: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Sites

Organizational Structures in Retail

Figure 25: Organizational Structures in Retail (Example)

When assigning sites to distribution chains, differentiate between:

� The organizational assignment in the site master basic data view (unbrokenline).

� The distribution chain, which supplies a site, in the site master customerdata (dotted line).

Franchise partners are always displayed as independent sites (for logisticalpurposes) and with a separate company code (for billing purposes).

You can create different sales units and sales prices for an article in eachdistribution channel.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 45

Page 54: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Site Profiles

Figure 26: Sites: Site Profiles (1/2)

Figure 27: Sites: Site Profiles (2/2)

The data that are required or possible in the site master record are defined inthe site profile.

46 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 55: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Sites

Site profiles subdivide the site categories and control the site maintenanceinterface. This is carried out when the site category is assigned and the field statusis maintained. The account group controls the screen structure for the customerand vendor segment in the site master.

You can also use the transaction-based field selection to control the field statusand the screen structure of the general site master data. The following list ofpriorities determines whether a field, or the contents of a field, is displayed orhidden in a transaction:

� Hiding a field is the top priority.� This is followed by display, required entry and optional entry fields.

To create a new site, you can also enter a reference site in the site profile. The copyrule determines the Customizing tables that are to be copied from the reference siteto the new site. Templates can also be entered for the customer and, if necessary,for the vendor master record.

Various site profiles, which you can copy and adjust according to yourrequirements, have already been delivered.

There is no number range for sites. Numbers are assigned externally. As arule, customers and vendors that belong to a site receive the same key as thecorresponding site. However, for customers and vendors there are number rangesthat are determined via the respective account group. When a new customer orvendor is created for the site, a check is carried out against these number ranges.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 47

Page 56: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

48 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 57: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Sites

Exercise 3: Sites

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a new site profile as a copy of an existing profile� Find and implement the functions for hiding fields in a site profile� Implement the transaction-dependent definition of required entry fields

Business ExampleYou want to create several stores for your distribution chain. To minimize theamount of work involved, all stores should be created with the same templates.The employee creating the stores must maintain certain fields immediately.

Task 1:You familiarize yourself with the site profile settings.

You create your own site profile so that you can use your template to create anew site.

1. Create a new site profile with the number P2## as a copy of profile P160.

2. You want to use your new site profiles to create stores. Select the relevantsite category.

3. For which three areas can you enter templates?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

4. What does the copy rule determine (F1 Help)?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

5. There is a function which you can use to hide fields, among other things.How do you navigate to this function?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

6. The Block Reason and Blocking period fields should be hidden in the sitesthat you create with your new profile. Make this change and save.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 49

Page 58: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Task 2:Also depending on the transaction you are using (Create, Change, Display), thefields in the site master can be defined as required entry, optional entry, display,or hidden fields.

1. Find out whether the Sales area (floor space) field (in the Layout data area)must be maintained when you create a new site.

Task 3:You can now define the tables that should be copied from the reference site whena new site is created.

1. To do this, use the copy rule used in the site profile. Which copy rule doesyour site profile P2## use?

______________________________________________________

2. Find out which tables are assigned to this copy rule.

______________________________________________________

50 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 59: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Sites

Solution 3: SitesTask 1:You familiarize yourself with the site profile settings.

You create your own site profile so that you can use your template to create anew site.

1. Create a new site profile with the number P2## as a copy of profile P160.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Plant Master→ Control Data→ SiteProfiles

b) Select site profile P160

c) Edit→ Copy as ...:

2. You want to use your new site profiles to create stores. Select the relevantsite category.

a) Site category for stores: A

3. For which three areas can you enter templates?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) The three possible areas are site, customer and vendor.

4. What does the copy rule determine (F1 Help)?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) The copy rule determines which tables should be copied from thereference site to the new site.

5. There is a function which you can use to hide fields, among other things.How do you navigate to this function?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) In the site profile maintenance: choose FieldStat. site

b) Warning message �The site profile of the template is P160� appears.Choose Enter to confirm it

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 51

Page 60: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

6. The Block Reason and Blocking period fields should be hidden in the sitesthat you create with your new profile. Make this change and save.

a) Double-click the Blocks group

b) Hide the Block Reason and Blocking period fields (set the radio button)

c) Field status→ Save

Task 2:Also depending on the transaction you are using (Create, Change, Display), thefields in the site master can be defined as required entry, optional entry, display,or hidden fields.

1. Find out whether the Sales area (floor space) field (in the Layout data area)must be maintained when you create a new site.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Plant Master→ Control Data→Transaction-Dependent Field Selection

b) Select Create plant

c) Choose Details

d) Choose FieldStat. site

e) Double-click the Layout data group

The Sales area (floor space) field is an optional entry field, so it doesnot have to be entered.

Task 3:You can now define the tables that should be copied from the reference site whena new site is created.

1. To do this, use the copy rule used in the site profile. Which copy rule doesyour site profile P2## use?

______________________________________________________

a) IMG: Logistics→ General→ Plant Master→ Control Data→Plant Profiles

b) Double-click the P2## profile

Your profile uses the copy rule 01.

2. Find out which tables are assigned to this copy rule.

Continued on next page

52 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 61: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Sites

______________________________________________________

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Plant Master→ Control Data→ DefineCopy Rule and Assign to Tables

b) Select row 01 Maximum rule and double-click Table assignment

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 53

Page 62: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the structure of sites� Name the various site categories� Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs

to the profile

54 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 63: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Create a site� List the ways you can subdivide sites� Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work

Business ExampleYou plan on changing the product presentation of your stores. All your company'sstores should look the same to customers and should carry the same merchandisecategories and articles.

The store is undergoing renovation, which means that it will close temporarily.

Subdivision of Stores with Departments

Figure 28: Sites: Site Subdivisions

A store may have several unloading points. The carrier brings the goods to thisunloading point.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 55

Page 64: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

A store has several departments. The department can be defined for each store andmerchandise category. When there is a delivery to a store, for each article you candetermine for which department the delivery item is determined.

The store also has several receiving points. One of the unloading points is assignedto each receiving point. One receiving point can be assigned to each department(example: department stores). The unloading point of a store is maintained inthe customer master data of the store.

Figure 29: Sites: Unloading Point - Receiving Point - Department

You create departments (in Customizing) which you will assign to sites withinyour company at a later stage. As a rule, departments are assigned to stores. Youcan then assign the departments, which are assigned to the store, to the individualmerchandise categories. A merchandise category cannot be assigned to morethan one department. However, several (different) merchandise categories can beassigned to one department.

When assigning the departments to the stores, you can assign a receiving point toeach department in the site maintenance. Only one receiving point can be assignedto a department. However, several (different) departments can be assigned toone receiving point.

Your receiving points are assigned to the defined unloading points. A receivingpoint can only be assigned to one unloading point. However, several (different)receiving points can be assigned to an unloading point. Unloading points mustalready have been created in the customer view of the site.

Department Stores and ShopsThe store categories Department Store and Shop were added to the site categoryStore for the department store/shop concept. The target groups are retail companiesthat want to perform detailed inventory management at department level.

56 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 65: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

If you want to process the departments in a store as independently operating units,you must define them as shops (site category Store, store category Shop). In thiscontext, the department store is the organizational unit that covers the individualshops, and is created with the site category store and the store category departmentstore. If you use the store categories Department Store and Shop, you can mapmultiple placements of articles in a site from an inventory management point ofview. In this case, the system manages the stock in the individual shops.

Figure 30: Department Store/Shop Concept

The basic concept of the SAP site is unchanged for the store categories DepartmentStore and Shop. All the processes in the standard (Retail) system are - in additionto the store level (Store Category:_) - also available at shop level (Store Category:Shop). This means the department store is fully integrated into the site masterdata model. Department Store and Shop are store categories that have a certainrelationship in the site master data concept. If you create the site master data for ashop, for this shop you must select an assignment to the relevant department store.If you link a shop to a department store, the system can assign to the appropriateshop the data, which you processed at department store level. This reduces thetime and effort involved in manual data entry at shop level.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 57

Page 66: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Figure 31: Creating a Department Store or Shop

The department store/shop model and the store model with departments are twodifferent ways of managing articles. The department store/shop model managesthe articles in more detail than the store model with departments, since theassortment is divided among the different shops and can only be used logisticallywithin the shops.

There are two user-friendly mass maintenance transactions that can be used tocreate shops. In one of the transactions, you start with the department store andcreate a number of shops. In the other transaction, you start with a category andcreate shops in several department stores for this category.

58 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 67: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

Blocking Sites

Figure 32: Sites: Blocking Reasons

Figure 33: Sites: Blocking Reasons

Example

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 59

Page 68: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Due to renovations, a site will be blocked from May 01 - 31. The report run onMay 1 will set the blocking reasons contained in the blocking reason (profile) asgeneral blocks in the customer segment of the site. The report run on the May 31removes these blocks again.

In Customizing, you can define blocking reasons (blocking profile) for an orderblock, delivery block or billing block.

You are able to block a site by assigning one of these blocking reasons to a siteand specifying a time interval.

On a daily basis, the background processing (report RWWLOCKD) checkswhether there is a blocking reason for a site, and sets central blocks (deliveryblocks, billing blocks and order blocks) in accordance with the blocking profile, ifthe sites should be blocked from the current date (Block from), or removes theblocks for the current date (Block to).

Blocks are always related to customer segments.

60 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 69: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

Exercise 4: Creating a Site

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a site with your site profile� Create a customer for your site

Business ExampleYou will soon be opening a new store and creating the relevant master record.

Task:For the new store you use the site profile, which you have already maintainedin the Sites lesson with the settings you wanted. Alternatively, you can use thesite profile P160.

1. Use the site profile P2## or P160 to create the site RT##. Do not enter areference site. Determine the reference site from the site profile.

2. Your site belongs to company code R300, purchasing organization R300and sales area RG10/R1/R1. The sales area is a combination of salesorganization, distribution chain and division.

The address is GM Store Gr##, Long Street 100 in 94124 San Francisco.The country key is US and the language is English. Your new store has asales area of 1000 m².

3. From where is the existing data in the new store defaulted?

______________________________________________________

Copy all other data that the system has defaulted.

4. Choose the relevant button to go to the customer. Which number is defaultedfor the customer of the site?

______________________________________________________

5. Which account group is used to create the customer and from where does thesystem determine the account group?

______________________________________________________

6. Confirm the individual customer views and take a closer look at them. Oncethe last customer view is displayed, the system automatically goes back tothe site master data.

7. As a rule, your new store is supplied by distribution center R7##. Assign thisdistribution center to your store as a supplying site and save.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 61

Page 70: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

You receive a query regarding copying classification data of the store.Choose No in response to this query.

8. Once you have saved, the system takes you to the Customizing data that is tobe copied. Confirm this by selecting the appropriate button.

62 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 71: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

Solution 4: Creating a SiteTask:For the new store you use the site profile, which you have already maintainedin the Sites lesson with the settings you wanted. Alternatively, you can use thesite profile P160.

1. Use the site profile P2## or P160 to create the site RT##. Do not enter areference site. Determine the reference site from the site profile.

a) Retail: Master Data→ Site Data→ Site→ Create

Site RT##Site profile P2##/P160

b) Choose YES to confirm the query

2. Your site belongs to company code R300, purchasing organization R300and sales area RG10/R1/R1. The sales area is a combination of salesorganization, distribution chain and division.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 63

Page 72: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

The address is GM Store Gr##, Long Street 100 in 94124 San Francisco.The country key is US and the language is English. Your new store has asales area of 1000 m².

a) Go to the Organization/calendar tab

Company code R300

Purch.Organization R300

Sales organization RG10

Distribution channel R1

Division R1

Calendar Factory calendar USstandard

b) Address tab

GM Store Gr##

Long Street 100

Address

94124 San Francisco

Country US

Language English

c) Go to the Layout/blocks tab

Sales Area 1,000 m²

3. From where is the existing data in the new store defaulted?

______________________________________________________

Copy all other data that the system has defaulted.

a) The available data is defaulted from the reference site.

4. Choose the relevant button to go to the customer. Which number is defaultedfor the customer of the site?

______________________________________________________

a) Choose Customer

The same key is defaulted for the customer as was defaulted for thestore: RT##

Continued on next page

64 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 73: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

5. Which account group is used to create the customer and from where does thesystem determine the account group?

______________________________________________________

a) P160 is defaulted from the site profile as the account group for creatingthe customer.

6. Confirm the individual customer views and take a closer look at them. Oncethe last customer view is displayed, the system automatically goes back tothe site master data.

a) Confirm each view by choosing Enter.

7. As a rule, your new store is supplied by distribution center R7##. Assign thisdistribution center to your store as a supplying site and save.

You receive a query regarding copying classification data of the store.Choose No in response to this query.

a) In the site master, choose Supplying Sites.

Supplying site R7##

b) Site→ Save

8. Once you have saved, the system takes you to the Customizing data that is tobe copied. Confirm this by selecting the appropriate button.

a) Choose Confirm in the Customizing tables view.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 65

Page 74: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

66 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 75: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

Exercise 5: Department Store and ShopMaintenance

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a new shop for the department store

Business ExampleIn addition to your stores, you also have large department stores in which youmanage stock at department level. A new department for children's fashion isopened in a department store of this kind.

Task:You create a new shop for an existing department store RD##.

1. Display your department store RD##. You can navigate to the assignedshops by choosing Display Assortments. Which shops are already assignedto the department store?

2. You now create a new shop RK## Fashion Shop Kids for your departmentstore RD##.

3. The articles from Category R3053 are assigned to the shop. It will beopened this day next week.

4. In the background, a site master is created for the shop. You can displaythis site master by choosing Environment → Display Plant Master.Organizational data is already assigned to the shop. Where does this datacome from?

5. Go back to the shop creation (Choose F3).

The shop is on the first floor of the department store and has a sales areaof 350m². 4 employees are working in the shop this year. Maintain thisinformation in the detail data for the shop.

6. Save the shop you have just created.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 67

Page 76: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Solution 5: Department Store and ShopMaintenanceTask:You create a new shop for an existing department store RD##.

1. Display your department store RD##. You can navigate to the assignedshops by choosing Display Assortments. Which shops are already assignedto the department store?

a) Retailing→ Master Data→ Site Data→ Department Store/Shop→Display Department Store/Shop

Site RD##

Site, general

b) Display Assortments

The shops RM## and RW## are already assigned.

2. You now create a new shop RK## Fashion Shop Kids for your departmentstore RD##.

a) Retailing→ Master Data→ Site Data→ Department Store/Shop→Create Shops via Department Store

Dept St. RD##

Enter

b)

Shop RK##

Shop Name Fashion Shop Kids

3. The articles from Category R3053 are assigned to the shop. It will beopened this day next week.

a)

Category R3053

Opening date One week from today

b) Select Set Up Shop Data

Continued on next page

68 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 77: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Site Maintenance

4. In the background, a site master is created for the shop. You can displaythis site master by choosing Environment → Display Plant Master.Organizational data is already assigned to the shop. Where does this datacome from?

a) Environment→ Plant Master

Enter

The shop data was copied from the relevant department store.

5. Go back to the shop creation (Choose F3).

The shop is on the first floor of the department store and has a sales areaof 350m². 4 employees are working in the shop this year. Maintain thisinformation in the detail data for the shop.

a) Choose [F3] to go back to the shop creation

Choose Det. Maint

Floor 1Sales area 350 m²Employee 4In Current year

Choose [F3] to go back to the shop overview.

6. Save the shop you have just created.

a) Shops→Save (Online)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 69

Page 78: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create a site� List the ways you can subdivide sites� Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work

70 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 79: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

Lesson: Layout

Lesson OverviewThe layout concept allows you to optimally structure the sales area of your storesin connection with your assortment. At the same time, it forms the basis for usingspace management systems.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the structure of a layout concept� Explain the space management function� Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

Business ExampleYou want to increase the recognition value of your stores among customers,and so you define certain sort criteria, according to which the articles should bepresented in the store.

The Layout ConceptYou can assign layouts to the assortments of a store.

Figure 34: Sites: Layout Concept

Every layout consists of layout modules that represent a fixed area in a store (forexample, a shelf). The layout area represents the spatial assignment of a layoutmodule in the layout.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 71

Page 80: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

An article can be assigned from the article maintenance to one or several layoutmodules.

The layout modules can be assigned to one or more layouts.

The layout can determine how the assortment list is sorted.

For the time planning, you can use the layout module versions with variousvalidity periods. In a layout module, the validity periods for individual versionsare unique and cannot overlap. Due to the time-based scheduling of the layoutmodules in versions, you can, for example, map seasonal changes in a shelf.

Figure 35: Layout Module Versions

The fixture can enhance the layout concept, so that you can arrange yourassortments according to their position. It displays your goods on the sales areaprovided. You can only place a limited number of fixtures on the sales floorprovided. Fixtures are assigned to layout module versions.

You can fill a fixture differently depending on the layout module version, andyou can assign it to a layout module version several times. In the system this ismapped with an assignment number. If you assign each fixture to a layout moduleversion only once, the assignment number is irrelevant.

To allow different capacities to be maintained differently for one and the samefixture for each layout module, the capacity is specified when a fixture is assignedto the layout module version. In this case, the system first proposes the defaultcapacity of the fixture that is defined in the basic data.

A layout module version is made up of one or more fixtures. The measurementsof a fixture are irrelevant. Therefore, one or more fixtures are always assignedto a layout module version, regardless of the fixture measurements. The existing

72 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 81: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

information of the shelf section is replaced by the fixture ID when articles areassigned to layout module versions. Fixtures are designed to be as flexible aspossible, in order to give the users different ways of managing the shelf.

The assignment of fixtures to the layout module version is only available in thelayout module version maintenance, but not in the fixture master.

Hint: If you want to use fixtures in your operational processes, you mustset this in the Customizing. You cannot reverse this selection.

Since stores generally carry thousands of articles, it can take a lot of time andeffort to assign layout modules and assortments to the stores and to create thecorresponding listing conditions in the host system. It also takes a lot of time andeffort to make changes to individual store layout modules, but this can be avoidedin a lot of cases. In particular in the case of stores, the assortments of which aresimilar (but not identical), you can use layout module variants to greatly simplifythese processes.

Figure 36: Layout Module Variants

A layout module variant can be understood as a sort of "exception module". Youcreate a module variant of this kind to include certain articles in a layout moduleversion or to remove certain articles from a layout module version. Layout modulevariants cannot be used alone; they are to be used in connection with a layoutmodule version. Therefore, they serve as "modifiers" for the layout modules inquestion. Normally, module variants are assigned to sites that differ from thestandard assortment least.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 73

Page 82: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

There is no limit to the number of changes a module variant can contain. Thenumber of articles that have just been added does not have to correspond to thenumber of articles that have been removed.

Figure 37: Sites: Procedure for Integrated Layout Maintenance

Figure 38: Space Management - Integration

Space management optimizes the placement of an article on a shelf from abusiness viewpoint. In this case, key figures are defined, and the position of anarticle should be optimized according these key figures. This usually concernssales data and revenue data, or the gross margin.

74 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 83: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

If there is not a suitable interface for space management:

� Data is maintained twice� Space management is not integrated into relevant business processes� New articles are not included in the planning process� Optimization results are not used

This interface guarantees regular data interchange and ensures that the spacemanagement program is provided with the most up-to-date data, and that spacemanagement is included in all relevant business processes.

When activities, for which space management is relevant, are carried out in SAPRetail (for example, a new article is included in the assortment and is assigned to ashelf), the interface is triggered - partly by a workflow, or automatically - whichmeans that you are guaranteed that it is immediately taken into account in thespace management program and data inconsistencies are avoided.

The optimized data can then be used again in SAP Retail, for example, theoptimized shelf quantities can be taken into account in the requirements planningor replenishment.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 75

Page 84: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

76 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 85: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

Exercise 6: Layout

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create layouts and assign stores

Business ExampleYou created a new store. For the effect of recognition, the articles in this storeshould be presented in the same sequence they are presented in existing stores.

Task:Since some additional articles are carried in your store, you create a new layouton the basis of existing data, and you enhance this layout according to yourrequirements.

1. In the layout module maintenance, create the new layout module ##01 withthe description Confectionary GR## and the layout module ##02 shouldhave description Beverages GR## :

2. You now want to fill your layout module with articles. Call the LayoutWorkbench and display your layout module Confectionery GR## . Whichversions already exist for your module and for how long are these versionsvalid?

___________________________________________

3. In version 0000, you include some articles from merchandise categoryRS11310 Cookies/Crackers. Select all articles with the unit of measureEA for the assignment.

4. Now copy a separate layout L## as a copy of layout FOOD with thedescription Layout Group##. Save your layout and confirm the informationmessage.

5. Add the modules ##01 and ##02 to your new layout L##. To do this, use theright side of the screen and choose Layout Modules.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 77

Page 86: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

6. Can a layout module appear more than once in a layout?

7. Can an area appear more than once in a layout?

8. What do you do if you want to replace an existing assigned layout modulewith another?

9. In the layout maintenance, you realize that a layout module is missing.Where can you create this layout module now from the layout maintenance?

10. Assign layout L## to store R1##.

11. The layout module ##01 receives a second version that is valid from the 21stto the 28th of the following month. Copy version 0000 with all the articlesthat belong to it.

Which status do you select for the version?

_____________________________________________________

What is the version number created for this layout module?

_____________________________________________________

78 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 87: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

Solution 6: LayoutTask:Since some additional articles are carried in your store, you create a new layouton the basis of existing data, and you enhance this layout according to yourrequirements.

1. In the layout module maintenance, create the new layout module ##01 withthe description Confectionary GR## and the layout module ##02 shouldhave description Beverages GR## :

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Layout→ LayoutModule Maintenance

b) Table View→ Change→ Display

c) Choose New Entries:

Layout Module ##01

Description Confectionery GR##

Layout Module ##02

Description Confectionery GR##

d) Table View→ Save

2. You now want to fill your layout module with articles. Call the LayoutWorkbench and display your layout module Confectionery GR## . Whichversions already exist for your module and for how long are these versionsvalid?

___________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Layout→ LayoutWorkbench

b) Program→ Execute

c) Go to the Start: Layout Modules tab

d) Layout module ##01

Version 0000 was automatically created with the validity period fromtoday to December 31, 9999.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 79

Page 88: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

3. In version 0000, you include some articles from merchandise categoryRS11310 Cookies/Crackers. Select all articles with the unit of measureEA for the assignment.

a) Expand layout module ##01 and click version 0000.

b) Select Assign Materials

c) Enter merchandise category RS11310 on the By Material tab andchoose F8

d) Select the Unit of Measure column and choose Sort in AscendingOrder

e) Select all articles with the unit of measure EA

f) Choose Assign

g) Enter

h) Save and exit the Layout Workbench.

4. Now copy a separate layout L## as a copy of layout FOOD with thedescription Layout Group##. Save your layout and confirm the informationmessage.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Layout→ LayoutMaintenance

b) Table View→ Display→ Change

c) Select FOOD and Edit→ Copy with Assignments to layout: L##

d) Table View→ Save

e) Confirm the information message by choosing Enter.

5. Add the modules ##01 and ##02 to your new layout L##. To do this, use theright side of the screen and choose Layout Modules.

a) Select L## and choose Update.

b) In the lower half of the screen on the right-hand side, select layoutmodules ##01 and ##02, and choose Assign.

6. Can a layout module appear more than once in a layout?

Answer: Yes, but always with different layout areas.

7. Can an area appear more than once in a layout?

Answer: No, unique numbers are assigned automatically in sequence.

Continued on next page

80 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 89: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

8. What do you do if you want to replace an existing assigned layout modulewith another?

Answer: You can choose Replace to replace a layout module with another inone or more layouts. Caution: the result is visible only after you save.

9. In the layout maintenance, you realize that a layout module is missing.Where can you create this layout module now from the layout maintenance?

a) Choose Layout Module Maintenance

b) Go to the Start: Layout Modules tab

c) Layout Module ##01

d) Program→ Execute

e) Select L##

f) Layout Areas button

g) Choose New Entries

Use consecutive numbers for the areas (for example, Area 1 = Module##01)

10. Assign layout L## to store R1##.

a) In the layout maintenance, choose the Stores tab

b) Select L## and choose Update.

c) Select store R1## and choose Assign.

d) If the following query is displayed: The layout XYZ is assigned to siteF1##. Do you want to replace it? Confirm by choosing Yes.

e) Table View→ Save

f) Table View→ Exit

11. The layout module ##01 receives a second version that is valid from the 21stto the 28th of the following month. Copy version 0000 with all the articlesthat belong to it.

Which status do you select for the version?

_____________________________________________________

What is the version number created for this layout module?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 81

Page 90: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 3: Sites IRT310

_____________________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Layout →Maintenance of Layout Module Version

b) Layout module ##01

c) Program→ Execute

d) Table→ Display→ Change

e) Select the layout module and choose Edit→ Copy with ArticleAssignments.

f) Answer the query Do you want to copy the layout module version? bychoosing Yes.

g) End date of the last version: 20th of the following month

h) In version 0001, enter the 28th of the following month in the ValidTo column.

i) Table→ Save

j) Table→ Exit

82 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 91: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Layout

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the structure of a layout concept� Explain the space management function� Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 83

Page 92: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the structure of sites� Name the various site categories� Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs

to the profile� Create a site� List the ways you can subdivide sites� Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work� Describe the structure of a layout concept� Explain the space management function� Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

84 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 93: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4Article Groupings

Unit OverviewThis unit explains the different ways in which articles can be grouped, andpresents the elements of the classification as the basis of the merchandise categoryhierarchy. It describes how to create merchandise category hierarchies and articlehierarchies. It also names the controls that are linked with the merchandisecategory in the site.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Explain the basic terms of the classification� Describe the class types used in SAP Retail� Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy� Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category

value-only and merchandise category reference articles� Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the

site� Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the

necessary settings for it� Describe the objective of the article hierarchy� Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy� Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy� Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a

time-dependent basis

Unit ContentsLesson: Classification .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Lesson: Merchandise Categories... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Exercise 7: Merchandise Categories .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories.. . . . . . .109

Exercise 8: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories 113Lesson: Article Hierarchy .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 85

Page 94: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Exercise 9: Article Hierarchy... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

86 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 95: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Classification

Lesson: Classification

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains how classification elements form the basis of the merchandisecategory hierarchy.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain the basic terms of the classification� Describe the class types used in SAP Retail

Business ExampleYou include various new merchandise categories in your assortment. Therefore,you need a new merchandise category hierarchy that you want to include in yourexisting hierarchy.

Since the merchandise category hierarchy in the SAP system is stored in the classsystem, this topic is now treated as a prerequisite.

Example of a Merchandise Category Hierarchy

Figure 39: Merchandise Category Hierarchy (Example)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 87

Page 96: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

A merchandise category hierarchy always consists of a top node and hierarchylevels arranged under this node. Each merchandise category can be assignedto one merchandise category hierarchy level. There is no limit on the numberof hierarchy levels that can be created.

Within a merchandise category hierarchy, the merchandise category of an articleis always the lowest merchandise category hierarchy level. Articles are alwaysassigned to the merchandise categories, and never to the hierarchy levels.

Classification

Figure 40: Classification: Terms

88 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 97: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Classification

Figure 41: Classification: Terms

A class (classification system) is a group of similar objects described by theircommon characteristics. Among other things, objects can be articles, batchesand documents.

The class type is a class that has been subdivided according to various objects andorganizational areas. In the classes that belong to a class type, there are onlyobjects of one type, for example, sites.

The class type controls, among other things, whether multiple assignments of asite or site groups respectively to other groups are allowed or not.

Any number of hierarchy levels can be created in the classification.

When you set up a class hierarchy, the characteristics of the higher-level classesare also inherited by the lower classes. Inherited characteristics are flaggedwith a special indicator. You can use this indicator to show from which class acharacteristic has been inherited.

Characteristic inheritance is the transfer of a characteristic and its values to allthe lower classes in the class hierarchy.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 89

Page 98: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Assignment to Applications

Figure 42: Classification: Applications

A class type is specified for each application, and in the classification system thereis a certain article or site grouping behind each class type. This setting specifieswhich class types are actually used, for example, by an application running onsite groups.

Example:

The allocation table can use site groups. In this case, these site groups groupsites, for which supply is to be guaranteed, into one group. The allocation tablethen uses such class types that are assigned to the application �03 Promotionand Allocation Table�.

The site groups of the relevant class types in the classification system must bemaintained as a prerequisite for this.

90 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 99: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Classification

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the basic terms of the classification� Describe the class types used in SAP Retail

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 91

Page 100: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy� Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category

value-only and merchandise category reference articles

Business ExampleYou include various new merchandise categories in your assortment. Therefore,you need a new merchandise category hierarchy that you want to include in yourexisting hierarchy.

Merchandise Category Hierarchy

Figure 43: Merchandise Category Hierarchies: Definitions

Merchandise category hierarchies are formed when individual hierarchy levelsare assigned or connected. There is no limit on the number of hierarchy levelsyou can define.

There are two types of hierarchy levels:

� Merchandise categories: You can only assign articles and, if necessary,characteristics profiles to merchandise categories

� Merchandise category hierarchy levels: You can only assign merchandisecategories or other merchandise category hierarchy levels to merchandisecategory hierarchy levels

92 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 101: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

You can assign a merchandise category reference article to every merchandisecategory. You can then use it as a template when you create articles. A referencearticle can be assigned to more than one merchandise category. The merchandisecategory reference article is not transferred to POS systems, and therefore cannotbe an article that is used operatively.

You can also create and assign a merchandise category value-only article for eachmerchandise category, which makes inventory management on a value-only basispossible at merchandise category level. The merchandise category value-onlyarticle can be used for merchandise category transactions at the POS.

A merchandise category hierarchy value-only article can also be defined for eachhierarchy level.

Figure 44: Merchandise Category Hierarchies: Characteristics

Characteristics can be assigned to hierarchy levels as well as merchandisecategories. The lower hierarchy levels inherit the characteristics that are assignedto the higher hierarchy levels.

Characteristics profiles are created below the merchandise category. They areused for the specialization/segmentation of the merchandise category and itscharacteristics. Several characteristics are included in a characteristics profile.

You can assign more than one characteristics profile to a merchandise category.In turn, a characteristics profile can be assigned to more than one merchandisecategory. Every article must be assigned to exactly one merchandise category, andcan also be assigned to a characteristics profile.

The characteristics profile is only important as a bearer of certain characteristicvalues during the creation of articles or variants. Otherwise, it has no operationaleffect in the Retail system as a whole. It is not important in the Logistics or RetailInformation System and it does not carry any other information.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 93

Page 102: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Customizing SettingsIn the general control for Retail master data, you define parameters that areimportant for different SAP Retail subfunctions on a client basis.

In the merchandise category control, you can set whether or not the system shouldissue a warning message when you are creating an article, if no reference articleis assigned to the merchandise category for which the article is being created.You can also specify a default valuation class that influences the general ledgeraccount determination for an article.

How to Create a Merchandise Category Hierarchy

Figure 45: Merchandise Categories: Creating a Hierarchy

You create new merchandise category hierarchies by adjusting the basic data.The maintenance of all the other views is optional. Next, you need to assign themerchandise category hierarchy levels one under another in the correct sequence(top-down assignment).

You can create merchandise categories by adjusting the basic data of themerchandise category and the merchandise category value-only article. Thishappens for merchandise category value-only articles and merchandise categoryreference articles in the article maintenance.

You assign a merchandise category hierarchy level to the merchandise category.

If necessary, you assign characteristics profiles to the merchandise category.

94 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 103: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

You can create characteristics for merchandise categories, hierarchy levels or otherobjects. You can choose the validity period of the characteristic. You change thebasic data of the characteristic.

If you want to assign a characteristic to a merchandise category or a merchandisecategory hierarchy level, note that the characteristics are assigned to themerchandise categories via the merchandise category maintenance. The assignedcharacteristics will be inherited.

Reclassification

Figure 46: Merchandise Categories: Reclassification

Changing the assignment of an article or a merchandise category within themerchandise category hierarchy is known as 'reclassification'. You may need tochange assignments for the following reasons:

� When an article was created, it was assigned to the wrong merchandisecategory due to an input error.

� Articles, which have turned out to be special articles in a merchandisecategory, must be assigned to a special merchandise category. For example,expensive cheeses in the Dairy Products merchandise category should bereassigned to the Delicatessen merchandise category.

� A merchandise category or merchandise category hierarchy level is too large,and therefore is not manageable and needs to be divided up. Articles ormerchandise categories in the old level are reassigned to a new one.

� You want to restructure objects against the background of the EfficientConsumer Response (ECR) or the introduction of Category Management.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 95

Page 104: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

The SAP system gives you two reclassification options:

� If you want to make extensive changes, you can use Article and MerchandiseCategory Reclassification.

� If you just want to change the assignment of individual articles, rather thanthe assignment of whole article areas or existing merchandise categories, youshould use the Article Reclassification function, which is simpler to use.Article reclassification is allowed for the Single Article, Generic Article withVariants and Structured Article article categories.

Figure 47: Merchandise Categories: Reclassification - Example

Possible reclassification processes:

� Reassigning Articles

An article is assigned to another existing merchandise category. It is alsopossible to split a merchandise category by creating a new merchandisecategory and moving a number of articles from one merchandise categoryinto this new one.

� Reassigning Merchandise Categories

Entire merchandise categories are moved across the same level in thehierarchy tree. All the elements and subtrees below the merchandise categoryare moved with them.

� Reassigning Hierarchy Levels

Entire merchandise category hierarchy levels are moved on the same level inthe hierarchy tree and all the subordinate objects are moved with them (thisincludes merchandise category hierarchy nodes, merchandise categories,characteristics profiles, generic articles, articles and variants).

96 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 105: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

You can reclassify the Single article, Generic article and Structured article articlecategories. The generic article is moved with all its variants.

The system runs many checks during reclassification, for example, whethercharacteristics and characteristic values have the same source and destination,whether stocks are available, and so on.

Figure 48: Merchandise Category Reclassification: Restrictions

The system:

� Makes assignments in the merchandise category hierarchy itself� Assigns an article to the merchandise category� Assigns open purchase order items to merchandise categories, if required� Adjusts the assortment module assignment� Adjusts an inventory-management value-only article of a merchandise

category hierarchy level

You can create a reclassification version of selected objects for a certain date. Inthis case, the changes are not actually written to the database - the reclassificationis merely simulated.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 97

Page 106: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

98 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 107: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Exercise 7: Merchandise Categories

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create merchandise category hierarchy levels and use the assignment

function to create your own hierarchy

Business ExampleYou want to extend your assortment. In a workshop, you and some colleagueshave decided on the merchandise category structure you require.

Task 1:Look at the merchandise category hierarchy of SMART Retailer Inc.

1. Display the hierarchy under the merchandise category object RS21000(General Merchandise Structure). How many levels are directly below thefirst level?

_______________________________________________________

2. How can you recognize the merchandise category in this display?

_______________________________________________________

3. Must all merchandise categories be assigned to the same hierarchy level?

_______________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 99

Page 108: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Task 2:You want to use the following new structure for your sales goods. You createit and add it to the existing merchandise category hierarchy under the node(hierarchy level) RS21000:

Figure 49: New merchandise category hierarchy

1. Create a merchandise category hierarchy level MCH10## with thedescription Furniture Gr.##.

2. Then create the remaining merchandise category hierarchy levels

Hierarchy Level DescriptionMCH1## House Gr##MCH2## Garden Gr##

Task 3:Now create the individual merchandise categories.

1. Create merchandise categoryMC1## with the description Kitchen Gr.##.Assign the MC (merchandise category) reference articleMC14201 to themerchandise category and then save the merchandise category.

2. Create merchandise categoryMC2## with the description Living Gr.##.Assign the MC reference articleMC14201 to the merchandise category andthen save your merchandise category.

Create a value-only article with the keyW_MC2## for this merchandisecategory. The description of the value-only article is Value-only articleLiving Gr##. Do not change any other data. Save the value-only article.

3. Create merchandise categoryMC3## with the description Garden furnitureGr.## and then save.

Continued on next page

100 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 109: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Task 4:Now create the mapped structure from the merchandise category hierarchy levelsand merchandise categories, and assign these under level RS21000 in the existingmerchandise category hierarchy of the sample company.

1. To do this, assign the hierarchy levelMCH10## to the hierarchy levelRS21000.

Then assign the levels MCH1## and MCH2## to the hierarchy levelMCH10##.

2. Then assign the merchandise categories to the corresponding merchandisecategory hierarchy levels as illustrated in the figure.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 101

Page 110: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Solution 7: Merchandise CategoriesTask 1:Look at the merchandise category hierarchy of SMART Retailer Inc.

1. Display the hierarchy under the merchandise category object RS21000(General Merchandise Structure). How many levels are directly below thefirst level?

_______________________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data →Environment→ Merchandise Category Usage

Merchandise category object: RS21000All merchandise category objects

b) Program→ Execute

There are 9 levels directly below the first level.

2. How can you recognize the merchandise category in this display?

_______________________________________________________

a) There are no longer any hierarchy levels under the merchandisecategory, there are now only assigned articles and sites.

3. Must all merchandise categories be assigned to the same hierarchy level?

_______________________________________________________

a) No, the merchandise categories can be assigned to any hierarchy level.However, only merchandise categories or hierarchy levels can belocated under a hierarchy level.

Continued on next page

102 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 111: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Task 2:You want to use the following new structure for your sales goods. You createit and add it to the existing merchandise category hierarchy under the node(hierarchy level) RS21000:

Figure 50: New merchandise category hierarchy

1. Create a merchandise category hierarchy level MCH10## with thedescription Furniture Gr.##.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Group Data→Material GroupHierarchy Level→ Create

Hierarchy Level MCH10##

b) Enter

Description Furniture Gr##

c) Save.

2. Then create the remaining merchandise category hierarchy levels

Hierarchy Level DescriptionMCH1## House Gr##MCH2## Garden Gr##

a) Proceed in the same way as described in the solution under point 1)

MCH1## House Gr##

MCH2## Garden Gr##

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 103

Page 112: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Task 3:Now create the individual merchandise categories.

1. Create merchandise categoryMC1## with the description Kitchen Gr.##.Assign the MC (merchandise category) reference articleMC14201 to themerchandise category and then save the merchandise category.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Group Data→Material Group→ Create

Merchandise category MC1##

b) Choose Merchandise category basic data

Mdse Catgry Desc. Kitchen Gr##

MG ref. material MC14201

c) Material Group→ Save

2. Create merchandise categoryMC2## with the description Living Gr.##.Assign the MC reference articleMC14201 to the merchandise category andthen save your merchandise category.

Continued on next page

104 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 113: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Create a value-only article with the keyW_MC2## for this merchandisecategory. The description of the value-only article is Value-only articleLiving Gr##. Do not change any other data. Save the value-only article.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Group Data→Material Group→ Create

Merchandise category MC2##

b) Choose Merchandise category basic data

Mdse Catgry Desc. Living Gr##

MG ref. material MC14101

c) Material Group→ Save

d) Create a value-only article: chooseMG material

Article W_MC2##→ EnterMdse Catgry Desc. Value-only article

Living Gr##

e) Material→ Save

3. Create merchandise categoryMC3## with the descriptionGarden furnitureGr.## and then save.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Group Data→Material Group→ Create

Merchandise category MC3##

b) Choose Merchandise category basic data

Mdse Catgry Desc. Garden furniture Gr##

c) Material Group→ Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 105

Page 114: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Task 4:Now create the mapped structure from the merchandise category hierarchy levelsand merchandise categories, and assign these under level RS21000 in the existingmerchandise category hierarchy of the sample company.

1. To do this, assign the hierarchy level MCH10## to the hierarchy levelRS21000.

Then assign the levels MCH1## and MCH2## to the hierarchy levelMCH10##.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Material Group Data→ HierarchyAssignment→Material Group Hierarchy Assignments→ Create

Hierarchy level RS21000→ [Enter]Hierarchy Level MCH10##

b) Assignment→ Save

c) Retailing: Master Data→ Material Group Data→ HierarchyAssignment→Material Group Hierarchy Assignments→ Create

Hierarchy level MCH10## → [Enter]Hierarchy Level MCH1##, MCH2##

d) Assignment→ Save

Continued on next page

106 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 115: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Merchandise Categories

2. Then assign the merchandise categories to the corresponding merchandisecategory hierarchy levels as illustrated in the figure.

a) Retailing: Master data→ Material Group Data→Material Group→ Change

b)

Merchandise category MC1##Hierarchy level MCH1##

Choose Create (beside MG hierarchy level)

c)

Merchandise category MC2##Hierarchy level MCH1##

Choose Create (beside MG hierarchy level)

d)

Merchandise category MC3##Hierarchy level MCH2##

Choose Create (beside MG hierarchy level)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 107

Page 116: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy� Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category

value-only and merchandise category reference articles

108 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 117: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Lesson: Correlation between Sites and MerchandiseCategories

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in thesite

� Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make thenecessary settings for it

Business ExampleYou defined new merchandise categories.

Carry out test sales in various stores and assign the new merchandise categories tothe corresponding stores.

Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Figure 51: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 109

Page 118: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

The assignments and their effects:

� Department: The department in which the contact person is working.� Assortment length: Relation for the definition of standard allocation rules in

the retailing system.� Price list type: The logical summary of business objects for the price

determination.� Pricing strategy: This establishes a recommended price from the competitors'

prices.� Class type: pricing; relates to the groups of competitors.� Groups of competitors: pricing. Groups of competitors can be assigned here.� Requirement groups: replenishment. Requirement groups for each

merchandise category.� Store procurement profile: replenishment. Controls the parameters for store

procurement.� Revaluation profile: This describes the sales price revaluation process.� Inventory management on a value-only basis: This establishes whether stock

is managed on an article or merchandise category basis.� Exceptions in inventory management: in case, in spite of inventory

management on a value-only basis, an article is managed on an article basis.� Supplying sites: alternative to the general supplying site.

110 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 119: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Basic Principles of Inventory Management on aValue-Only Basis

Figure 52: Inventory Management on a Value-Only Basis

In value-based inventory management, goods movement are not posted on anarticle basis. There is no quantity-based, but only a value-based update which isposted to a value-only article. To find the value-only article for posting, the systemuses value only article determination.

A value-only article can be created for each merchandise category. To fine-tuneinventory management on a value-only basis in a merchandise category, severalgroup articles can be created for this merchandise category.

A merchandise category hierarchy value-only article can be created for amerchandise category hierarchy node. It therefore incorporates all articles of themerchandise categories under this node. If a store uses cross-merchandise-categoryinventory management, you must decide on a merchandise category hierarchylevel on which the inventory management is to be carried out. Without thislimitation, sales values that do not make business sense may appear - especially instatistics showing comparisons between sites.

In the store, you use the "IM Profile" in the Valuation/Inventory Management viewof the site master to determine the type of inventory management to be used forthe store in question. Eight profiles are delivered in the standard system; thesecannot be changed. Within a merchandise category on value-based inventorymanagement, you can post some articles on an article basis, for example, whenthese are particularly valuable items.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 111

Page 120: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

You can define your own profiles by copying one of the existing profiles (using thecustomer namespace). In the copy, you can set the Value-only mat. free indicator.This way, every value-only article can be used in any hierarchy level.

Valuation at retail must have been activated in the store.

112 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 121: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Exercise 8: Correlation between Sites andMerchandise Categories

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Make settings to carry the stock of a merchandise category on a value-only

basis in a store� Assign a merchandise category to a site� Use mass maintenance to assign a merchandise category to several sites

Business ExampleYour new merchandise categories are to be carried in a test run in store R1## andthen later in other stores too.

Task 1:You are dealing with the settings for the inventory management on a value-onlybasis in the store.

1. Find out which settings you need to make for inventory management on avalue-only basis in your store R1##.

2. What does the IM Profile (F1) determine?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

3. At which levels is inventory management permitted in your store?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

4. Is Valuation at Retail activated?

______________________________________________________

5. In future, the store R1## will sell articles from the merchandise categoriesRF11111 and RF11112. Assign the two new merchandise categories to thestore.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 113

Page 122: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Task 2:You also want to carry the articles in these merchandise categories in someother sites. To reduce the amount of work involved in this, you use the massmaintenance.

1. Choose Retailing: Master Data→ Site Data→ Environment→ Sites toMerchandise Category and allocate the merchandise categories of themerchandise category hierarchy level RF11100 to the sites R4## and R5##.

114 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 123: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Solution 8: Correlation between Sites andMerchandise CategoriesTask 1:You are dealing with the settings for the inventory management on a value-onlybasis in the store.

1. Find out which settings you need to make for inventory management on avalue-only basis in your store R1##.

a) Retail: Master Data→ Site Data→ Site→ Change

Site R1##

2. What does the IM Profile (F1) determine?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) Go to the Valuation/Inv. Mgmnt tab

b) F1 Help for field contents IM Profile

The IM Profile specifies whether or not the inventory management atvalue-only level is planned for a site, and at what level.

3. At which levels is inventory management permitted in your store?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a)

IM Profile 0002

Stock can be done on both a material and material group basis.

4. Is Valuation at Retail activated?

______________________________________________________

a) Valuation at Retail is activated.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 115

Page 124: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

5. In future, the store R1## will sell articles from the merchandise categoriesRF11111 and RF11112. Assign the two new merchandise categories to thestore.

a) Scroll down the merchandise category overview and enter:

Mer.cat. RF11111

Mer.cat. RF11112

b) Site→ Save

Task 2:You also want to carry the articles in these merchandise categories in someother sites. To reduce the amount of work involved in this, you use the massmaintenance.

1. Choose Retailing: Master Data→ Site Data→ Environment→ Sites toMerchandise Category and allocate the merchandise categories of themerchandise category hierarchy level RF11100 to the sites R4## and R5##.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Site Data→ Environment→ Sites toMerchandise Category

Merchandise category hierarchy RF11100

Program→ Execute

b) Select the merchandise category hierarchy and choose Assignment→ Create

c) On the following screen, select the sites R4## and R5##.

d) Choose Create assignment

116 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 125: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the

site� Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the

necessary settings for it

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 117

Page 126: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the objective of the article hierarchy� Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy� Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy� Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a

time-dependent basis

Business ExampleSince the standard merchandise category hierarchy you use is oriented towards thepurchasing viewpoint, you want to set up an alternative hierarchy. This hierarchywill focus on the sales viewpoints.

Defining the Article HierarchyThe article hierarchy gives you the option of grouping articles according tocustomer-specific criteria. Thereby, often sales-relevant aspects are taken intoaccount while the merchandise category hierarchy is oriented towards the materialattributes of the article.

The article hierarchy is taken into account in planning, in operative processesand in reporting.

You also have the option of linking shops with the article hierarchy in order todisplay merchandise areas in the department store.

118 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 127: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Figure 53: Article Hierarchy: Example

If a tree does not exist yet, on the Node Assignments tab define the top node (rootnode) and specify a description for this node. A node must have a description.You can assign an unlimited number of nodes to the top node, select descriptionsfor the nodes and define the node characteristics on the Node Attributes tab. Onthe Article Assignments tab, you can assign articles to every node of the hierarchy.On the Language-Specific Texts tab, you can maintain language-dependent nodedescriptions for each node, and on the Free Text tab, texts can be defined foreach node.

In the standard, the article hierarchy maintenance offers the following accessoptions in the detail view:

Access with Node ID Only:

If you want to navigate to the detail maintenance with a hierarchy node, you canuse the node collective search help to select a node or enter a node ID and a keydate directly (in the case of a scheduled hierarchy).

Access with Article Only:

If you want to navigate to the detail maintenance with an article of the hierarchy,you can use the article search help to select an article or enter an article number anda key date directly (in the case of a scheduled hierarchy). The detail maintenanceis always accessed with the parent node of the articles's directly assigned node.

Access with Node ID and Article:

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 119

Page 128: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

If the user wants to navigate to the detail maintenance with an article of thehierarchy, and wants to restrict the search for an article (because, for example,he/she always works with articles of a certain node), then this node can be selectedas an additional selection criterion.

By setting the Operative indicator, the Valid From date of the node assignment isset to the current date.

By setting the Deletion Flag indicator, the Valid To date is set to the current dateor, in the case of an OTB-relevant change, it is set to the end date of the completedelivery period. The logically deleted node assignment can be physically deletedon the end date (for example, by a scheduled deletion report).

You can navigate from the hierarchy maintenance to, for example, the departmentstore/shop maintenance, by choosing Event. You can only navigate to thedepartment store/shop maintenance from a node that is flagged as a Category.

Every article hierarchy is created with the status planned. Time-dependent nodeand article assignments can be defined in this status, but these changes do not affectthe operational assignments. An article hierarchy can be activated and in this wayused operatively as soon as the planning of the assortment structure is complete.

Once the hierarchy is activated, only limited changes can be made to it. In anunscheduled article hierarchy, only article assignments can be changed. In ascheduled hierarchy, only the future structure and article assignments can bedeleted manually.

An article hierarchy, which should no longer be used operatively, can bedeactivated. Deactivated article hierarchies cannot be changed or activated.

The article hierarchy is included as a node search help in many operative SAP forRetail processes (including Price Planning Workbench, Purchase Order).

120 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 129: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Article Hierarchy Maintenance

Figure 54: Attributes of the Article Hierarchy

The following Attributes of the hierarchy can be defined for a new articlehierarchy that is to be created:

� Distribution Chain (Sales Organization and Distribution Channel)

If a BW update is set, you can only activate one distribution chainindependent article hierarchy (i.e. one client-wide) or distribution chainspecific article hierarchies with a different distribution chain each.

� BW

This indicator specifies whether the article hierarchy should be transferred toSAP BW. Specification is optional.

� Multiple Material Assignment

The �Multiple Material Assign.� indicator controls the assignment of anarticle within an article hierarchy.

� Scheduling

By setting the �Structure Scheduling� indicator, structural changes can bescheduled on a time-basis, in other words, the change becomes valid whenthe �Valid From� date is reached.

� Language-Specific Hierarchy Descriptions

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 121

Page 130: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

The article hierarchy automatically has the status planned. To use the hierarchyin operative processes and to extract the hierarchy into SAP BW, the hierarchymust be activated.

Figure 55: Article Hierarchy: Integration

Customizing Settings for the Article HierarchyTo make it easier to navigate in the article hierarchy, you can define a hierarchylevel semantic (description of the hierarchy level) in Customizing. The levelsare defined top down, in other words, the first level in the hierarchy structurecorresponds to the top node level of the article hierarchy, the second levelcorresponds to the child node level of the top node, and so on. Furthermore, onelevel of the article hierarchy can be defined as the category level in the table.

122 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 131: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Figure 56: Customizing: Edit Hierarchy Levels

Defining hierarchy level semantics only makes sense in properly defined hierarchystructures. The node in the hierarchy does not transfer the semantics when nodesare moved between levels. Once the semantics have been defined, they can onlybe changed if no article hierarchy exists yet in the system.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 123

Page 132: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

In the Customizing table, you can maintain an article hierarchy level as a categorylevel. When a hierarchy node is created (in the hierarchy maintenance or from anexternal system by means of the BAPI interface), the system checks whether it isa node from this category level. Defining nodes or an article hierarchy level asa category means that:

� The category is the root node of the assigned Consumer Decision Tree (CDT).� The category defines the uppermost assortment-forming node.� In the Category Management, the category is the uppermost relevant node

for the update into SAP BW.� If multiple article assignment is used, the category is the node to resolve the

multiple assignment. Within the category, the article is always assigneduniquely.

� If multiple article assignment is used, the category is the node to determinethe department store-shop assignment.

� Defining a category level makes it easier to maintain the category if a certainlevel of the article hierarchy and therefore all nodes of this level are definedas categories. Alternatively, you can manually maintain hierarchy nodesby means of the hierarchy maintenance, but only if no level is selected asa category. A plausibility check ensures that only one level can be definedas a category level.

You can only change the category indicator if there is no article hierarchy in thesystem.

In the dialog screen, you can create an Event pushbutton for every level of thearticle hierarchy; this will allow you to navigate to every other program or everyother transaction without making any modifications. At this point, you candetermine a description for the Event pushbutton.

If an internal number range interval is globally defined for the article hierarchy,the internal number assignment in Customizing can be overridden by an externalnumber assignment on a level-specific basis.

124 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 133: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

The following additional Customizing settings can also be checked:

� Change Documents

When the change document flag is set, change documents are generatedwhen articles and nodes are changed in active article hierarchies. The flagstatus is checked when the article hierarchy is activated.

� Check End Nodes

If the Check End Nodes indicator is selected, the system performs a checkfor value-only articles in an active article hierarchy which ensures that thearticles are only attached to end nodes.

� Delete Check

If the Delete Check indicator is activated, node assignments can only bedeleted if no nodes or articles are assigned to the node.

� CDT Update

You can use this parameter to control the update of the master data of thearticle hierarchy in SAP BW. If the parameter is activated, the master datais updated in SAP BW without scheduling information, provided also theindicator for the BW update is set for the hierarchy. If the parameter is notactivated, the master data of the article hierarchy (up to ten levels) is updatedin SAP BW including scheduling information (validity periods of scheduledarticle hierarchies).

� Number Range Interval

You can use this parameter to globally specify an internal or external numberrange interval for the article hierarchy on a customer-specific basis.

� Sorting

You can use this parameter to define the sorting within the tree display. Bydefault, the article hierarchy is sorted by the technical node ID. However,you can also define sorting by the node description.

Individual tree columns can also be hidden in the article hierarchy dialogmaintenance. In the case of an internal number assignment, by hiding thenon-descriptive �Node ID� column, for example, you can use the article hierarchynodes description to navigate.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 125

Page 134: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

126 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 135: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Exercise 9: Article Hierarchy

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy

Business ExampleYou want to introduce a new department in your stores and would therefore liketo tentatively enhance the article hierarchy. You do this in an article hierarchywith the status 'planned'. Once the decision for introducing the new departmentis final, the changes will be activated.

Task 1:

1. How many active article hierarchies can there be in the system?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A exactly one distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchy□ B several distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchies□ C exactly one distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy□ D several distribution-chain-independent article hierarchies□ E exactly one distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy and

several distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchies.

2. The article hierarchy replaces the merchandise category hierarchy.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

3. The article hierarchy has the following attributes:Choose the correct answer(s).□ A It can be scheduled.□ B It is dependent on the purchasing organization.□ C Multiple assignments can be activated.□ D It cannot be extracted into SAP BW.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 127

Page 136: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Task 2:

1. Create a new distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy ## with thedescription AH## as a copy of the active hierarchy �R3�. Copy the hierarchywith article assignments. The assignments should be scheduled and multipleassignment of articles should be enabled.

2. Now change the copied article hierarchy and add a new department and twonew themes in this department. For one theme, you create two new areas thatcorrespond to your brands. Assign the following IDs and descriptions:

Department:

R30## � Beauty ##

Theme:

R30##1 � Cosmetics ##

R30##2 � Perfume ##

Area (for the theme Cosmetics):

R30##11 � Loveal ##

R30##12 � Richy ##

The validity starts with the current date and runs indefinitely.

3. Assign the articles R1TA08## and R1TA09## to the lowest node R30##11 �Loveal.

4. Now compare the new planned hierarchy with the active hierarchy, and seewhere the differences are. To do this, simulate the copy of the new node youhave created (R30##) under the highest node of the active article hierarchy.Also compare the assigned articles.

128 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 137: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Solution 9: Article HierarchyTask 1:

1. How many active article hierarchies can there be in the system?

Answer: B, C

In the system there can be several distribution-chain-dependent articlehierarchies and exactly one distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy.

2. The article hierarchy replaces the merchandise category hierarchy.

Answer: False

3. The article hierarchy has the following attributes:

Answer: A, C

The article hierarchy can be scheduled and multiple assignments can beactivated.

Task 2:

1. Create a new distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy ## with thedescription AH## as a copy of the active hierarchy �R3�. Copy the hierarchywith article assignments. The assignments should be scheduled and multipleassignment of articles should be enabled.

a) Logistics→ Retailing→ Master Data→ Article Hierarchy Data→ Create

b) TransactionWMATGRP01

c) Enter the hierarchy ID ## and leave the fields for the sales organizationand the distribution channel empty. In theWith Template subscreen,specify the ID of the active article hierarchy R3. Set theWith MaterialAssignments indicator and the Multiple Material Assignment andStructure Scheduling indicators. The indicator for BW extractionis already set.

d) In the Language Maintenance subscreen, assign the text AH## in thelanguage EN. Choose Execute. Two messages appear, which informyou that the BW connection is not supported and the article hierarchycannot be used in operative processes. (This is only possible for articlehierarchies.)

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 129

Page 138: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

2. Now change the copied article hierarchy and add a new department and twonew themes in this department. For one theme, you create two new areas thatcorrespond to your brands. Assign the following IDs and descriptions:

Department:

R30## � Beauty ##

Theme:

R30##1 � Cosmetics ##

R30##2 � Perfume ##

Area (for the theme Cosmetics):

R30##11 � Loveal ##

R30##12 � Richy ##

The validity starts with the current date and runs indefinitely.

a) Menu path: Logistics -> Retailing -> Master Data -> ArticleHierarchy Data -> Change

b) TransactionWMATGRP02

c) Enter the hierarchy ID ## and choose Execute. The highest node R3� Enterprise is automatically selected. On the right-hand side, thenodes under the Node Assignments tab are maintained via the CreateNode Assignment.

d) Enter the current date as the Valid From date and 31.12.9999 asthe Valid To date. Choose Enter.

e) Then, on the left-hand side of the screen, select the node that has justbeen created, and create the two themes in the same way. Then, onthe left-hand side of the screen, select the theme R30##1 and createthe two areas.

3. Assign the articles R1TA08## and R1TA09## to the lowest node R30##11 �Loveal.

a) Choose Logistics -> Retailing -> Master Data -> Article HierarchyData -> Change

b) TransactionWMATGRP02

c) In the article hierarchy tree, select the node R30##11 and maintainthe article assignment in the right-hand screen area under the ArticleAssignments tab. Choose Create Multiple Assignments to do this.

Continued on next page

130 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 139: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Hierarchy

4. Now compare the new planned hierarchy with the active hierarchy, and seewhere the differences are. To do this, simulate the copy of the new node youhave created (R30##) under the highest node of the active article hierarchy.Also compare the assigned articles.

a) Menu path: Logistics -> Retailing -> Master Data -> ArticleHierarchy Data -> Simulate

b) TransactionWMATGRP08

c) In this transaction, enter the source hierarchy AH-ID ## and thedepartment node you have just created (R30##). The target hierarchyis the active hierarchy R3 and the target node is the highest node of thishierarchy, which is also called R3. In the case of a copy, the new nodeR30## was assigned as a child node under the node R3.

d) Set theWith Material Assignments indicator and choose Enter.

e) In the Checks subscreen, set all flags for the target hierarchy. ChooseExecute. The system then displays which nodes and which articles aremissing in the active hierarchy.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 131

Page 140: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 4: Article Groupings IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the objective of the article hierarchy� Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy� Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy� Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a

time-dependent basis

132 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 141: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the basic terms of the classification� Describe the class types used in SAP Retail� Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy� Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category

value-only and merchandise category reference articles� Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the

site� Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the

necessary settings for it� Describe the objective of the article hierarchy� Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy� Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy� Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a

time-dependent basis

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 133

Page 142: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

134 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 143: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5Assortment Management

Unit OverviewThis unit explains the term assortment and the concept of assortment management.It also explains how to set up listing procedures and their parameters, as well aspossible combinations.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail� Name the different ways of managing assortments� Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management� Name the different listing procedures and describe their options� Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles� Create an assortment list for the listed articles� Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the

system� Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

Unit ContentsLesson: Assortment .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Exercise 10: Reference Site .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Exercise 11: General Assortments .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Lesson: Listing Procedures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Exercise 12: Listing Procedures... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Lesson: Assortment List .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175Exercise 13: Assortment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 135

Page 144: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail� Name the different ways of managing assortments� Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management

Business ExampleBased on criteria that you established previously, you have to decide which articlesyour new store can order.

Definition: AssortmentThe assortment is part of the cross-company merchandise offering that is assignedto a specified target group for a particular validity period.

An assortment determines if a store, a distribution center or a customer can receivecertain articles at a certain time. The assortment can therefore be used to checkpurchase orders and sales orders.

By assigning articles to assortments, you determine which assortments and,therefore, which articles a store can buy and sell. A site cannot buy or sell articlesthat are not included in one of its assortments.

In assortment management, you determine for each site and each articlerespectively which site may procure an article in which time period. This is alsocalled listing.

136 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 145: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Figure 57: Local and General Assortment

The assortment is an SAP Retail object, to which articles are assigned, that islisted, for a particular period of time.

There are two types of assortments:

� Local Assortments

These are termed type A for stores and type B for distribution centers. Whenyou create a site (in other words, a store or distribution center), the systemautomatically creates a local assortment and then assigns it to the site. Thislocal assortment is site-specific and cannot be assigned to another site. Eachsite has one local assortment.

� General Assortments

General assortments are type C assortments. They can be assigned to anynumber of customers, and every customer can be assigned several generalassortments. If you have set the indicator for multiple assignments inCustomizing, you can also use assortments of this type to assign stores anddistribution centers.

Assortment ManagementThe assortment management demands of retailers differ greatly. Some requireidentical assortments in all areas, while others demand assortments unique(for example) to each store. Assortment Management takes account of thesedifferences and offer a variety of tools to allow any combination of articleassortments as well as the structuring of article assortments for wholesale.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 137

Page 146: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

The main tasks of assortment management for retail sites or customers are:

� Determining articles that can be sold at a point of sale in a store� Adding these articles to the article assortment that is assigned to this store's

distribution center.� Determining the distribution centers from which articles are to be distributed,

when stores are to be supplied from the warehouse� Determining the stores in which the article can be sold at the point of sale� Determining the articles that should be included in the customer assortment

Figure 58: Assortment Management

An assortment is an object that is assigned articles for a particular validity period.This assignment results in listing conditions, which serve as the basis for variousevaluations.

Once an assortment user is assigned to an assortment, articles for the assortmentuser in question can be used in various business functions. The most importantassortment user in Retail is the retail site. The assortments of a site include all thearticles that are relevant in its business activities.

138 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 147: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Figure 59: Multiple Assignments of Assortments

In Customizing, you can determine whether the multiple assignment (n:m)of assortments to sites should be possible, or whether assortments should belimited to a 1:1 combination of the site and the assortment. If you activatemultiple assignment in Customizing, a site can have different assortments and anassortment can be assigned to different sites.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 139

Page 148: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

If a site is created, the system automatically generates a site-specific localassortment.

� In the case of 1:1 assignment, every site has exactly one local assortment.No other assortment can be assigned to this site.

� In the case of n:m assignment, every site still has a local assortment, butthere is no limit to the number of general assortments that can be assignedto this site.

Hint: Converting an existing 1:1 assignment to multiple assignment

In earlier releases of the ERP system, only a 1:1 assignment of assortmentsto sites was possible. Accordingly, every store could only have oneassortment, and a certain assortment could only ever be assigned toone store. In the current release, you can choose between the old1:1 assignment and the new n:m assignment. This less restrictiveassignment means that you have the option of assigning previouslycreated assortments to an existing store (for example, when new stores areopened) , and you can more precisely adjust the goods on offer in a storeby assigning one or more general assortments to the store. You shouldonly decide on single assignment (1:1) or multiple assignments (n:m) aftercareful consideration. This is particularly important because changing theassignment method affects all aspects of the listing process.

You can find a detailed description of how to convert the 1:1 assignmentto multiple assignments at http://help.sap.com under the menu optionUpgrading to Multiple Assignment of Assortments to Site in the SAPonline documentation for SAP Retail.

Figure 60: Assortment Management with the General Assortment

140 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 149: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

In many retail companies, the assortments, for example, for a distribution chain orfor a particular region, are generally identical or are only slightly different. Forthis reason, you should only define a few general assortments and then assignthem to a group of assortment users.

Depending on how the indicator for the multiple assignment of assortments to sitesis set in Customizing, you have the following options:

� If the indicator is set, stores, distribution centers or customers can be usedas assortment users.

� If the indicator is not set, only customers can be used as assortment users.

You can significantly reduce the number of listing condition records on thedatabase by using multiple assignments, as a general assortment can sometimes beassigned to a large number of sites. This is due to the fact that articles are listedfor assortments and not for sites, and therefore, the listing conditions created arevalid for all the sites that are assigned to the assortment. Unlike local assortments- which you cannot change using the assortment maintenance and which youtherefore cannot assign to other customers or sites - in general assortments(assortment category C) you can assign an unlimited number of sites or customers,provided that the multiple assignment (n:m assignment) of sites to assortmentsis activated in Customizing.

Exclusion modules can be used to define exceptions for assortments. This meansthat individual articles are explicitly excluded from being listed in an assortment.

Figure 61: Assortment Management with the Reference Site

In addition to the individual assignment of a general assortment to an assortmentuser, you also have the option of defining reference sites and assigning themto sites in a 1:m assignment.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 141

Page 150: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

The main advantage of the reference site is the one-time assignment of generalassortments. All dependent sites (sites that are assigned to the reference site)automatically adopt all the assortments from the reference site. Via this pointerfunction, changes made to general assortments and changes relating to assignmentsof general assortments to the reference site, are automatically conveyed. .

Assortments can only be assigned by means of reference sites if multipleassignment (n:m) is set in Customizing.

If you delete the assignement of a site to a reference site, all the assignments of thereference site's assortments to the site are also deleted.

Figure 62: An Overview of the Assortment Management Options

A site cannot be assigned to an assortment twice (directly and via the referencesite). However, the site can be assigned to an assortment directly and to anotherassortment via the reference site.

142 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 151: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Assortment Management Options

Figure 63: Assortment Management with the Reference Site (Example)

Every reference site can have several assortments (n:m).

Every store can be assigned to only one reference site for the assortmentmanagement (1:m).

Figure 64: Assortment Management with the General Assortment (Example)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 143

Page 152: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

In assortment management with the general assortment you can map areas(for example, beverages, confectionary) that reflect (among other things) thedepartments in the stores. For each of these areas, you create one or more generalassortments with different article assignments.

Then you assign the general assortments to the stores.

Assortment MaintenanceIn the assortment maintenance, you can assign assortment users to generalassortments.

Figure 65: Maintaining Assortments

There is a user-friendly assortment assignment tool available for assigningassortment users to general assortments. This tool allows you to sort the displayedsites, for example, according by region (as above), or to select for sites that are notyet assigned for new sites that have been created. The system displays two treestructures: a list of the general assortments and their already assigned sites on theleft, and a list of sites for which assignments are still possible on the right. Youdrag and drop to assign the selected sites to the desired assortment.

You can also create or change new general assortments in that assortmentassignment tool.

In the assortment maintenance, you assign a layout or an article hierarchy (withcorresponding hierarchy nodes) to the merchandise categories (and assortmentgrades, if applicable). However, it is only possible to assign customers in the

144 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 153: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

'Create/Change Assortments' transaction, while sites can be assigned in thetransaction for creating or changing the assortment and in the tool for assigningassortments.

Assortment ModulesAn assortment can consist of one or more assortment modules. An assortmentmodule is a group of articles. Examples are Household Cleaner or Ladies' Blouses.

Assortment modules can be created manually, or automatically from theapplications (article maintenance, promotion, etc.). To minimize the time andmaintenance effort, modules should be created automatically rather than manually.

Figure 66: Maintaining Assortment Modules

A profile module is created automatically during the article maintenance for eachassortment and merchandise category.

You generate shelf modules during the maintenance of layout modules that areassigned to the assortments.

A promotion module contains the articles that are to be dealt with together in apromotion or a theme.

A standard module contains any articles from any merchandise categories. Itcontains the regular long-term rule assortment and is created manually.

The local module is only valid for one site and is therefore the �local assortment�.

You can use an exclusion module to exclude articles from the existing assortmentfor a certain period of time.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 145

Page 154: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Rack jobber modules are modules for which vendors deliver and present articlesin stores themselves. A rack jobber module can only be assigned to exactly onevendor. An article that is listed in a rack jobber module cannot be listed in anyother module.

In Sales and Distribution, you use assortment modules to maintain a number ofarticles for value contracts. Like standard modules, you can also use thesemodules for assortment functions. You use a different transaction for creatingthem in Sales and Distribution (WSV2).

Create Assortments for New SitesIf you open new sites and want to create assortments for them in a very short time,you can select one of the following options:

� Setup based on Merchandise Category� Assortment Copy� Assign the new site to the general assortments (directly or via a reference site)

However, you must check whether or not the multiple assignment is active. Theassortment copy is only possible if the indicator is not set, while the site can onlybe assigned to general assortments when multiple assignments is active.

1. Setup based on Merchandise CategoryYou can organize the assortment of the new site by adding articlesfrom available merchandise categories that are already assigned to the assortment,and executing transaction WSM8 (Reorganize Listing Conditions By MerchandiseCategory).

146 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 155: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Figure 67: Setup based on Merchandise Category

You can define one or more merchandise categories and add them to thetarget assortment. The system checks the existing listing conditions for everycombination of articles and assortments. If an article is not in the target assortment,the article is listed there.

2. Assortment Copy

If the indicator for the multiple assignment of assortments to sites is not set inCustomizing, you can simply copy the contents (the assigned articles) of a wholeassortment to the local assortment of the new site. If the new assortment is tocontain the same articles as an assortment that already exists, you only need tocopy the listing conditions from the source assortment.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 147

Page 156: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Figure 68: Assortment Copy

The source assortment can consist of one or more assortment modules. When youcopy an assortment into an other assortment, you also copy these assignments. Ifthe source assortment consists of modules A,B and C, the target assortment has thesame modules. You can execute the copy program for assortments in dialog mode(transaction WSK1) or in the background (transaction WSK3). In both cases, thesystem checks in advance that there are no problems that would prevent listing.

3. Assignment of General Assortments/Reference Site

If the indicator for the multiple assignments of assortments to sites is set inCustomizing, you can assign existing general assortments to the site. This meansthat all articles contained in these assortments are also valid for the new site.

148 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 157: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Figure 69: Assignment of General Assortments/Reference Site

In addition to the individual assignment of a general assortment to an assortmentuser, you also have the option of assigning a reference site to the new site. Thismeans that the new site has the same assignments to assortments as the referencesite. If assortments are already assigned to a site, it can only be assigned to areference site if the reference site contains the same assortment assignments. Thereference site is assigned in transaction REFSITE.

Further Maintenance for the Operative Use of NewSitesTo operatively use a new store that has just been created, not only must assortmentsbe assigned to this store, but purchasing and logistics data also have to bemaintained for this store. To proceed with this as efficiently as possible, you canarrange similar stores into groups and maintain data for a whole group at once,instead of for every individual store.

Store groupings can be formed on the basis of different criteria, for exampleaccording to geographical location, size and demographic aspects. Some retailcompanies use the same store groupings for all functional areas, while other retailcompanies use different store groupings for different functional areas. Large andrapidly expanding retail companies may open a new store every second day oreven more often. It is critical that such store openings run smoothly, as this hasa significant influence on the mark that a retail chain leaves in a new market.Therefore, simple and efficient data maintenance is very important in this process,both when setting up the master data of the new store and when processing thefirst purchase orders.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 149

Page 158: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

You can use store groupings for the maintenance of purchasing data (vendor/sitedata, purchasing info records and purchase conditions), assortment data andlogistics&replenishment data. After you use reference stores to create the masterdata for a new store, and a multiplier for the consumption data, you can carry outthe forecast for the new stores and then start a replenishment run to automaticallygenerate the first store orders.

Reference stores for purchasing and logistics data are also defined and assigned intransaction REFSITE.

Figure 70: Process of a Store Opening

Reference Site for Purchasing Data

You can maintain vendor and site data, purchasing info records and purchasingconditions for a group of sites. Use the reference sites for the purchasing to dothis. Such a reference site represents all sites that are assigned to it. The datais only stored at reference site level and is always used if there is no specificcorresponding data at store level.

As an extension of the supply source determination, the vendor and site data canalso be used to limit vendors to only the assigned sites. If a vendor is assigned to areference site, this vendor supplies all sites that are assigned to the reference site.

Reference Site for Logistics and Replenishment Data

You can maintain logistics and replenishment data for all stores (general referencestore) or for all stores of a certain distribution chain (reference store at distributionchain level). You can now also use transaction REFSITE to create a store groupingaccording to customer-specific criteria. Since the replenishment and logistics datausually do not differ in different distribution chains, but rather between groups ofsites (that are defined by common attributes such as size, geographical location,

150 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 159: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

and so on), it may be a good idea to maintain this data on the reference site. Thereis a separate mass maintenance tool that can be used to maintain logistics andreplenishment data at this level.

The section Create Assortments for New Sites already dealt with the various waysyou can create assortments for new stores.

Subsequent Listing of ArticlesUnder certain circumstances, in the case of goods receipt or a stock transfer,articles may be delivered to a site in which they are not listed. A promotion articlemay be listed in a distribution center, which then delivers the article to stores forwhich this article is not listed. Or a vendor sends a new article instead of an oldarticle that is no longer carried. The site may accept the new article, even if it isnot currently contained in the assortment of the site.

For each site you can specify whether the goods receipt is allowed for deliveriesof this kind. If the goods receipt is allowed, the system automatically creates thecorresponding article master data and listing conditions ("Subsequent Listing"), sothat the goods receipt can be posted for this delivery. If subsequent listing is notallowed, the delivery cannot be accepted and must be returned to the sender.

To make subsequent listing possible, you must define under what circumstancessubsequent listing should be carried out, by making the relevant settings in the sitemaster data. You have the following selection options:

� Always� Never� On the basis of the decision of the user during the goods receipt

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 151

Page 160: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Figure 71: Listing during Goods Receipt

152 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 161: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Exercise 10: Reference Site

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Evaluate information about assortments� Assign a reference site to the stores

Business ExampleYou have a lot of stores in your company that plan their assortments in a verysimilar way. You therefore use reference sites, the assortment of which is assignedto other stores.

Task 1:In future, the site RS## should be used as a reference site for the assortmentsof store R5##.

1. Define RS## as a reference site for assortments and then assign site R5##to this reference site. Then choose Create Job Without Param. Control,Immediate and Save.

2. Can you also assign a customer master to a reference site?

_________________________________________________________

Task 2:The system contains a general assortment with the key R1KIDSS##. Obtain anoverview of the organization and structure of the assortment.

1. Display the assortment R1KIDSS##. You want to add the new merchandisecategories RF11311 and RF11312 to this assortment. Assign the merchandisecategories RF11311 and RF11312 with the assortment grade 1 to theassortment R1KIDSS##.

2. Which assortment users are already assigned?

_________________________________________________________

3. Assign your reference site RS## to your assortment as a further assortmentuser.

4. Find out from which articles the assortment R1KIDSS##T is composed.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 153

Page 162: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Solution 10: Reference SiteTask 1:In future, the site RS## should be used as a reference site for the assortmentsof store R5##.

1. Define RS## as a reference site for assortments and then assign site R5##to this reference site. Then choose Create Job Without Param. Control,Immediate and Save.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→Mass Maintenance→ Reference Sites Management

b) Select Reference Site→ Create.

Group Type 01 Assortment

Reference Site R4##

c) Select reference site R4##

d) Choose Add a Site

Site R5##

e) Save: Choose Create Job Without Param. Control, Immediate andthen Save.

2. Can you also assign a customer master to a reference site?

_________________________________________________________

a) Customer master records can only be assigned to general assortments,not to a reference site.

Continued on next page

154 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 163: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Task 2:The system contains a general assortment with the key R1KIDSS##. Obtain anoverview of the organization and structure of the assortment.

1. Display the assortment R1KIDSS##. You want to add the new merchandisecategories RF11311 and RF11312 to this assortment. Assign the merchandisecategories RF11311 and RF11312 with the assortment grade 1 to theassortment R1KIDSS##.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→General Assortment→ Change

Merchandise category RF11312

Assortment grade 1

Merchandise category RF11311

Assortment grade 1

Choose Save

2. Which assortment users are already assigned?

_________________________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→General Assortment→ Display

Assortment R1KIDSS##

b) Go to the Assortment User tab

3. Assign your reference site RS## to your assortment as a further assortmentuser.

a) Go to the Assortment User tab and enter RS## as the site.

4. Find out from which articles the assortment R1KIDSS##T is composed.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Evaluations→ ForAssortments→ Article per Assortment

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 155

Page 164: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

156 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 165: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Exercise 11: General Assortments

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create general assortments� Assign merchandise categories and sites to a general assortment

Business ExampleIn a workshop, you and your colleagues have developed a concept for futureassortment planning. You have defined different article areas and want to definetwo general assortments for these article areas: large (L) and small (S). Foreach store, you decide, depending on the size of the department, which generalassortment is assigned to the individual areas of the store.

Task 1:You start by implementing your concept in the Food area.

1. Create two new assortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S by using theassortments FOOD-L and FOOD-S as the copy template. Also copy theassortment users, which are already assigned to the templates, to your newassortments.

For your general assortments, assign the descriptions Groceries, LargeAssortment and Groceries, Small Assortment.

2. Which assortment category do the two new assortments have?

_________________________________________________________

3. You add merchandise category RS12310 (Chicken) to your new assortmentFOOD-##-L.

Task 2:Once you have defined the assortments with the relevant merchandise categories,assign articles to the assortment. Use the mass maintenance function Setup Basedon Merchandise Category to do this.

1. List all articles in merchandise categories RS12110 to RS12320 in theassortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S with listing procedure B1. Notethat articles are also listed in the supplying sites of the stores. However, localassortments should not be selected for listing.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 157

Page 166: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Task 3:

1. Store R4## will have a large food department. You assign the appropriateassortment. Select the relevant assortment and assign your store R4## to theassortment in the Assortment User tab.

2. Which other assortment users are assigned to your assortment FOOD-##-L?

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

Task 4:

1. Check which listing conditions were created for your store R4##. To do this,check the tree display of listing conditions in evaluations for the article.Display all the listing conditions for merchandise category RS12310 for theassortment FOOD-##-L .

2. Expand the nodes for the other sites of the tree structure in the example of anarticle and compare the listing modules. What do you notice?

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

158 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 167: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

Solution 11: General AssortmentsTask 1:You start by implementing your concept in the Food area.

1. Create two new assortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S by using theassortments FOOD-L and FOOD-S as the copy template. Also copy theassortment users, which are already assigned to the templates, to your newassortments.

For your general assortments, assign the descriptions Groceries, LargeAssortment and Groceries, Small Assortment.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→General Assortment→ Create

Assortment FOOD-##-L

Template FOOD-L

Assortment Name Food, large assortment ##

Assortment FOOD-##-S

Template FOOD-S

Assortment Name Food, small assortment ##

2. Which assortment category do the two new assortments have?

_________________________________________________________

a) C - General Assortment

3. You add merchandise category RS12310 (Chicken) to your new assortmentFOOD-##-L.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→General Assortment→ Change

Assortment FOOD-##-L

b) Go to the Mdse Cat. tab

Merchandise Category RS12310

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 159

Page 168: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Task 2:Once you have defined the assortments with the relevant merchandise categories,assign articles to the assortment. Use the mass maintenance function Setup Basedon Merchandise Category to do this.

1. List all articles in merchandise categories RS12110 to RS12320 in theassortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S with listing procedure B1. Notethat articles are also listed in the supplying sites of the stores. However, localassortments should not be selected for listing.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→Mass Maintenance→ Assortment→ Setup Based on MerchandiseCategory

Assortment FOOD-##-L

Merchandise Category RS12110 to RS12320Listing Procedures B1

b) Select Also List Supplying Site

c) Do not select List Local Assortments Also

Task 3:

1. Store R4## will have a large food department. You assign the appropriateassortment. Select the relevant assortment and assign your store R4## to theassortment in the Assortment User tab.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment→General Assortment→ Change

Assortment FOOD-##-L

b) Go to the Assortment User tab

Assortment User R4##

c) Save and then choose Create Job Without Param.Control, Immediateand then Save.

2. Which other assortment users are assigned to your assortment FOOD-##-L?

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

160 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 169: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment

_________________________________________________________

a) The stores 1241, 1251 and 1271 are already assigned to the assortment.

Task 4:

1. Check which listing conditions were created for your store R4##. To do this,check the tree display of listing conditions in evaluations for the article.Display all the listing conditions for merchandise category RS12310 for theassortment FOOD-##-L .

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Evaluations→ ForMaterial→ Tree Display of Listing Conditions

b)

Merchandise Category RS12310Assortment FOOD-##-L

c) Choose Execute

2. Expand the nodes for the other sites of the tree structure in the example of anarticle and compare the listing modules. What do you notice?

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

a) Expand the menu nodes of the stores and the general assortmentFOOD-##-L or FOOD-##-S is listed.

As the modules are created for each general assortment, the samemodule exists for all articles for every store.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 161

Page 170: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail� Name the different ways of managing assortments� Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management

162 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 171: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Listing Procedures

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Lesson OverviewCreate a listing procedure together with its parameters and other possiblecombinations

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the different listing procedures and describe their options� Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles

Business ExampleBased on criteria that you established previously, you have to decide which storescan order which articles.

Basic Listing Procedures

Figure 72: Basic Procedure: Profile Check with Merchandise Category

The basic procedure 'profile check' examines whether the article's merchandisecategory has been assigned to the assortment. Only then the article will be listedfor this assortment.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 163

Page 172: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Figure 73: Basic Procedure: Profile Check with Assortment Grades

The basic procedure profile check with assortment grades checks

� Whether the merchandise category, to which the article belongs, has beenassigned to the assortment

� Whether the article assortment grade is contained in the result grade of themerchandise category in the assortment

� Whether the listing algorithm, which contains the assortment grade, hasbeen entered in the listing procedure

Only then will the article be listed for this assortment.

Figure 74: Assortment Grade Rules (Example)

164 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 173: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Listing Procedures

A listing algorithm describes how the assortment grades are combined in theassortment grade rule. Assortment grade rules describe the relationship betweenthe various assortment grades. A quantity of assortment grade rule entries thatbelong together are grouped together in a "Listing Algorithm".

Several listing algorithms can be used for defining the assortment grade rules. Thelisting algorithm that is to be used must then be entered in the listing procedure.

You must maintain assortment grades and listing algorithms to be able to use theassortment grade rules.

Currently, a maximum of 20 assortment grades can be contained in an assignmentrule.

Figure 75: Basic Procedure: Layout Check

The basic procedure layout check checks:

� Whether the article is assigned to a layout module� Whether the site is linked to a layout� Whether the article layout module is a layout area in the assortment's layout

Only under these conditions the article will be listed for the assortment in question.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 165

Page 174: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Figure 76: Layout Check with Space Management

If space management is used for listing, then you are guaranteed that there willbe space on the shelf for the new article and that the article will be listed in thestores where that shelf can be found (in other words, in the stores to which therelevant layout module is assigned) and in the distribution centers that deliver tothese stores.

A layout module can contain several layout module versions. Layout moduleversions have a time reference and contain articles in a shelf. Layout moduleversions can contain articles from different merchandise categories. An articlecan be assigned to several layout module versions and can also be positioned indifferent places on a shelf in the same layout module version. The versions allowyou to plan in advance. In a layout module, the validity periods for individualversions are unique and cannot overlap.

Due to the time-based scheduling for layout modules, you can map seasonalchanges in a shelf.

The listing period corresponds to the validity period of the layout module versionsto which the articles are assigned.

There are layout module variants at layout module version level. Layout modulevariants refer to just one layout module version and are used to map regional oreven store-specific variances in layout modules. The layout module variants havethe same validity period as their versions.

166 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 175: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Listing Procedures

Figure 77: Basic Procedure: Classification Check

This procedure checks whether the classifying parameters of the article(characteristics and values) correspond to those of the assortment.

Only then will the article be listed for this assortment.

Customizing Settings for the Listing Procedure

Figure 78: Listing Procedure - Control

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 167

Page 176: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Assortment listing procedure:

If this indicator is set, the listing procedure defined in the assortment must be used.Otherwise, the procedure entered in the dialog is used.

External procedure:

Once an entry is provided, this procedure can be used directly in dialog mode (inassortment maintenance transactions).

Multiple listing:

If an article has already been listed by an assortment module, it can only be listedby other modules too if you set this indicator. This is the standard case (forexample, in promotion listing and standard listing).

Sequence control:

You can use this control to set up various combinations of basic procedures.

Rules:

The type of check is determined by the rules and links of the basic procedures.Each basic procedure must be linked with a function module. The rules areimplemented with user exits and you can replace them with your own rules.

Figure 79: What happens in listing?

Listing updates listing conditions in table WLK1. Among other things, listingconditions contain the validity periods and the module numbers.

Data is also added to MVKE, the table in which the sales data for the article isstored (for example, the distribution chain and the sales unit of measure).

168 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 177: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Listing Procedures

Furthermore, data is stored in table MARC. It contains site-specific article data,such as RP type, planning cycle, planning calendar, and so on. Data records forthe respective supplying sites are also written into table MARC alongside thelisted sites of a distribution chain.

Data records are also created by the listing in tables MARA, WLK2, MBEW andMAW1, among others.

The contents of the tables can be checked in transaction se16.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 169

Page 178: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

170 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 179: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Listing Procedures

Exercise 12: Listing Procedures

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Define a listing procedure� List articles in your assortment

Business ExampleYou have to decide which checks should be carried out in future to determinewhich articles are to be listed in the stores. For that purpose you have to knowthe settings for the listing procedures.

Task:You are now going to look at the listing procedure in more detail.

1. To date, listing of articles in your assortments was done via the merchandisecategory check. In Customizing, check the settings for the relevant existingbasic listing procedure.

2. Check the basic procedure, which lists an article in a site if its merchandisecategory or its assortment grade are managed there.

Which indicator do you use to control whether or not the assortment gradeshould be checked during the listing?

_________________________________________________________

3. How would you ensure that, in addition to the merchandise category, thelayout in the article and the site was checked too?

Hint: Do not save the settings.

_________________________________________________________

4. What does a listing algorithm describe?

_________________________________________________________

5. Look at the listing algorithm in more detail. Which assortment levels doesthe assortment grade rule Extended assortment contain for the listingalgorithm 01 and in what way are these two connected?

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 171

Page 180: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Solution 12: Listing ProceduresTask:You are now going to look at the listing procedure in more detail.

1. To date, listing of articles in your assortments was done via the merchandisecategory check. In Customizing, check the settings for the relevant existingbasic listing procedure.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Assortment→ Assortment→ ListingProcedures

2. Check the basic procedure, which lists an article in a site if its merchandisecategory or its assortment grade are managed there.

Which indicator do you use to control whether or not the assortment gradeshould be checked during the listing?

_________________________________________________________

a)

Listing procedure B1Basic procedure mat. grp./ assortment grade

Indicator No astmt grade

3. How would you ensure that, in addition to the merchandise category, thelayout in the article and the site was checked too?

Hint: Do not save the settings.

_________________________________________________________

a) In the process control, set link rule &, and set L layout comparisonprocedure and Exit lstg lay. (Do NOT save!)

4. What does a listing algorithm describe?

_________________________________________________________

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Assortment→ Assortment→ ListingAlgorithm

A listing algorithm describes the combination of assortment grades.This also defines which assortment grades are added in a resultassortment grade.

Continued on next page

172 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 181: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Listing Procedures

5. Look at the listing algorithm in more detail. Which assortment levels doesthe assortment grade rule Extended assortment contain for the listingalgorithm 01 and in what way are these two connected?

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Assortment→ Assortment→ AssortmentGrade Rules→ select assortment grade 01/3 , and choose Details.

Result assortment grade 3 contains assortment grades 1,2 and 3.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 173

Page 182: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the different listing procedures and describe their options� Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles

174 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 183: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

Lesson: Assortment List

Lesson OverviewThe following lesson defines the attributes of the assortment list and explainshow to use them.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Create an assortment list for the listed articles� Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the

system� Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

Business ExampleYour stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any newarticles that are being added to your assortment.

Attributes of the Assortment List

Figure 80: Assortment List: Definition

The assortment list provides an overview of the listed assortment. The assortmentlist keeps the store or customer (assortment user) informed of any changes inthe assortment (new or discontinued articles, price changes, promotion articles,and so on).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 175

Page 184: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Assortment lists can be configured according to the situation and assortment,and they can be prepared in different media (in print format, or as an electronicmessage sent for a store retailing system).

Assortment List Versions:

� Full Version

This version contains all currently valid articles and article data (from thedate on which the assortment list was created).

� Change Version

This version contains only those articles that have been changed since thelast message was created.

� Mixed Version

This version contains the last full version with all the subsequent changesand therefore shows the current status. This means that a current version canbe printed out at any time.

The version management provides an overview of the versions that have beencreated, together with their validity periods, and a display (of the assortment list)on the screen.

Figure 81: Contents of the Assortment List

The assortment list contains selected data of the article maintenance, which isrelevant for the assortment user (store or customer).

A source of supply is determined for the articles, so that the store knows withwhom to place orders (several vendors are also possible here).

176 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 185: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

Transactional data could also be read here (promotion, allocation tables, purchaseorders). This data should support the requirements planning of a store, forexample. However, note that an evaluation of this data has a significant effecton performance.

Store layout information is available for creating shelf-edge labels, for articleplacement, and for planning by visual inspection of the shelves.

Customizing Settings for the Assortment List

Figure 82: Assortment List Type

For each assortment list type, you can create your own cycle control for thepreparation of assortment lists.

The cycle control includes:

� The lead time� The cycle for generating change versions� The number of change versions until a full version of the assortment list is

created

One assortment list type can be assigned to every article. An assortment list typemust be assigned to an article if the article is to appear in the assortment list.

It is recommended to create just a few types assortment list types in the same wayas article types were created.

The control of the logistic quantities uses the parameters for the assortment listto determine which transaction data (for example, previous purchase orders)should be read for an assortment list. To be able to do this, you must have alreadymaintained the assortment list types.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 177

Page 186: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

You specify a logistical unit of measure - for example, a purchase order quantityor a quantity to be allocated - for each of the various assortment list types.

If quantities from previous logistical processes (for example, old purchase orders)are to appear in the assortment list, then the past period limits the number of daysfor which the system searches documents of the relevant article. This preventsthe system from reading documents that are too old.

Figure 83: Assortment List Profile

The assortment list profile groups together the control parameters to generateassortment lists. It can be used for several sites. An assortment list profile canbe assigned to every site. Without an assortment list profile, no assortment listcan be generated for the site.

The assortment list profile parameters control the generation and the appearanceof assortment lists. With these parameters, you can determine the following:

� Whether IDocs are created for electronic distribution� Whether the data is stored in the assortment list version management� How the articles are sorted� What data is created� What an assortment list entry should look like� In the assortment list, whether articles should also appear for the sales period

(after the listing period is finished)

178 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 187: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

It is advisable to maintain just a few assortment list profiles. If sites have the sameassortment list profile, they are processed more quickly when the assortmentlists are generated.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 179

Page 188: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

180 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 189: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

Exercise 13: Assortment List

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Request assortment lists and set the corresponding control options.

Business ExampleYou want to inform your store about changes in your assortment, and thereforeyou use a new assortment list for articles of certain merchandise categories.

Task 1:Generate a new assortment list.

1. Now generate an assortment list of assortment list type S for site R1##,the merchandise categories RS11110 to RS11120 and distribution channelRG10/R1 by requesting it manually.

2. Display the assortment list you have created and check the sorting and thevalidity of your assortment list. Where are these settings made?

Task 2:You are now dealing with the settings for the assortment list in Customizing.

1. Display the settings for assortment list type S in Customizing.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 181

Page 190: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

2. How often is a change version generated before a full version is sent tothe store again?

3. How long is the validity period of a generated assortment list?

Task 3:In the assortment list profile you define how the assortment list should be sortedin the store in question.

1. Which assortment list profile is assigned to store R1##?

2. Display the settings for the assortment list type S in the assortment listprofile RSUP in Customizing.

Continued on next page

182 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 191: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

3. Which sorting procedure is used in profile RSUP in the assortment listtype S?

4. Are layout modules also analyzed in this assortment list setting?

Task 4:Assortment list functions and options

1. How can the SAP Retail assortment list support the MRP controller?Mention the assortment list functions and options. Which ones are optionsimportant for planning by visual inspection?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

2. Which three prerequisites must be fulfilled so that an article can be includedin an assortment list, and so that an assortment list can be created for a store.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

3. How can articles be grouped together for an assortment list? Name the fieldin the article master data.

______________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 183

Page 192: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Solution 13: Assortment ListTask 1:Generate a new assortment list.

1. Now generate an assortment list of assortment list type S for site R1##,the merchandise categories RS11110 to RS11120 and distribution channelRG10/R1 by requesting it manually.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→Generate→ Manual Selection:

Sales Organization RG10

Distribution Channel R1

Customer No. -Plant R1##

Merchandise Category RS11110 to RS11120Assortment List Type S

Choose Program→ Execute or F8

2. Display the assortment list you have created and check the sorting and thevalidity of your assortment list. Where are these settings made?

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→ Display

Sales Organization RG10

Distribution Channel R1

Customer No. -Site R1##

Assortment List Type S

Time Period for Selection Today

Program→ Execute

Sorting is carried out according to vendor and merchandisecategory, and the validity period is 5 days.

The settings for the validity and sorting are made in the assortment listprofile for the assortment list type in Customizing.

Continued on next page

184 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 193: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

Task 2:You are now dealing with the settings for the assortment list in Customizing.

1. Display the settings for assortment list type S in Customizing.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Assortment→ Assortment→ AssortmentList Types

2. How often is a change version generated before a full version is sent tothe store again?

Answer: Four times

3. How long is the validity period of a generated assortment list?

Answer: 7 days

Task 3:In the assortment list profile you define how the assortment list should be sortedin the store in question.

1. Which assortment list profile is assigned to store R1##?

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Site Data→ Site→ Display

b) Site R1##

c) Go to the POS tab

The assortment list profile is RSUP.

2. Display the settings for the assortment list type S in the assortment listprofile RSUP in Customizing.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Assortment→ Assortment List→Maintain Profile for Assortment Lists

b) Select the assortment profile RSUP and chooseMaintain assortmentlist profile parameters .

c) Double-click the assortment list type S.

3. Which sorting procedure is used in profile RSUP in the assortment listtype S?

Answer: Sorting procedure 4 - The articles are displayed in the assortmentlist sorted according to vendor, material group and material number.

4. Are layout modules also analyzed in this assortment list setting?

Answer: No, the indicator for analysing the layout modules is not set.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 185

Page 194: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 5: Assortment Management IRT310

Task 4:Assortment list functions and options

1. How can the SAP Retail assortment list support the MRP controller?Mention the assortment list functions and options. Which ones are optionsimportant for planning by visual inspection?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) The assortment list supports the MRP controller in planning by visualinspection insofar as the assortment list can be printed out in paperform, can be sorted according to the layout and can contain thepurchase order values.

2. Which three prerequisites must be fulfilled so that an article can be includedin an assortment list, and so that an assortment list can be created for a store.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) An assortment profile must be assigned to the store.

b) An assortment list type must be assigned to the article.

c) The article must be listed in the assortment of the store.

3. How can articles be grouped together for an assortment list? Name the fieldin the article master data.

______________________________________________________

a) You can use the assortment list type to group together the articles (forexample, assortment list type for food, fashion, and so on)

186 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 195: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Assortment List

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create an assortment list for the listed articles� Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the

system� Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 187

Page 196: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail� Name the different ways of managing assortments� Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management� Name the different listing procedures and describe their options� Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles� Create an assortment list for the listed articles� Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the

system� Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

188 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 197: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6Single Articles

Unit OverviewThis unit explains how you can create an article master record, use the article fastentry, configure the article maintenance for each user, and discontinue articles.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Create an article master record� Name the various article categories� Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the

organizational units� Maintain the individual views in the article master� List the integrated mass maintenance options� Describe what the article core master data is� Explain how you can use the maintenance groups� Explain the use of the article monitor� Describe the different ways of copying the article� Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT

function� Edit a PRICAT catalog item� Post a PRICAT catalog item� Name the possible uses of the article list� Describe the different kinds of article lists� Create your own article lists� Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs� Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences� Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its

life cycle� Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article

discontinuation

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 189

Page 198: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Unit ContentsLesson: Creating Articles ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Exercise 14: Creating Articles .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Exercise 15: - optional .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Lesson: Article Fast Entry .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224Exercise 16: Article Fast Entry.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Lesson: PRICAT ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Exercise 17: PRICAT ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Lesson: Article List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Exercise 18: Article List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Exercise 19: Configuring the Article Master .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

Lesson: Article Discontinuation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Exercise 20: Article Discontinuation ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

190 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 199: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Lesson: Creating Articles

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes how you can create an article master record.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Create an article master record� Name the various article categories� Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the

organizational units� Maintain the individual views in the article master

Business ExampleYou include a new article in your assortment and you need to maintain the datanecessary for supply chain processes.

The employees who work with the article master in different areas should onlybe able to process the data that is relevant to them.

Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any newarticles that are being added to your assortment.

Due to a particular article's poor sales figures, you decide to remove it from yourstore's assortment.

Structuring the Article Master

Figure 84: Article Master Record Definition

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 191

Page 200: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 85: Article Categories

Single articles are articles that don't have any characteristics in common with otherarticles, for example unscented cleaning agents. Generic articles with variantsare articles that only differ from one another in certain characteristics values,for example, colors or sizes.

Structured articles are made up of several different articles. You must entercomponents and quantities which are used for the components in the structuredarticles.

The display is a number of single articles or variants of one or more genericarticles, which is purchased as an individual article, and therefore has as an articlenumber and purchasing price, and purchase price conditions. The manufacturer orvendor prepares the display.

A sales set is a number of single articles or variants of one or more generic articles,which is sold as an individual article, and therefore has an own article number andsales price, and sales price conditions.

Purchasing sets are already purchased as sets, are managed as a set right throughthe supply chain and are sold as a set or as individual components.

A prepack consists of a number of variants of one or more generic articles, ispurchased as an individual article, and therefore has an article number, a purchaseprice and purchase price conditions. Unlike displays, the components of a prepackmust belong to the same merchandise category as the prepack itself.

192 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 201: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Figure 86: Article Maintenance Views

The basic data of an article incorporates all client-wide-valid data of an article,which is valid regardless of the vendors who supply the article or the sitesin which the article is carried. The following belong to the basic data: unitsof measure, EANs, article groupings, control data for internal processes (forexample, assortment list types), validity data, different texts, characteristics frommerchandise categories and possibly other freely definable classification data.

In listing, you determine in which sites an article is to be carried and in whichperiod inbound deliveries can be received and sales are possible.

In the purchasing data, a connection is created between articles andvendors/purchasing organizations.

Sales data controls the sale of an article in a distribution chain. The sales datacontains sales prices and internal control data for shipping.

Important logistics data for the distribution centers and stores is recorded in thelogistics views. It includes requirements planning parameters and forecasting data.

The POS (Point of Sale) data contains POS-specific data in addition to POSreceipt texts.

In addition to article-relevant data, an article master record contains data fromother areas that are relevant for the article. These areas are called user departmentsin the article master. Unnecessary data storage is avoided when all data is stored ina single database object.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 193

Page 202: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 87: Organizational Levels and Views

Possible organizational data entries for the individual views:

� There are no restrictions to basic data.� You can restrict the listing when you access the article master: sales

organization and distribution channel .� In order to be able to create purchasing data, you must enter a purchasing

organization and a vendor. You have the option of restricting the validity to asite and/or vendor sub-range (VSR).

� Sales data can only be maintained for the combination sales organization -distribution channel. Additionally, sales data can be maintained at site levelor price list level (wholesale customers).

� The logistics data can be maintained for one distribution center or one store,or for the reference sites. If it is maintained for the reference sites, thenit is automatically maintained for all sites. Reference sites are defined inCustomizing. There is a reference distribution center and a client-wide validreference store or reference stores at distribution chain level. Don't specifyone particular site or distribution center in the initial screen; instead alwaysmaintain the data of the reference site.

� You must enter at least a distribution chain to completely maintain the POSdata.

The data that is maintained in a view can be valid for various organizational levels.

194 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 203: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Figure 88: Reference Article

Due to the large amount of data in the article maintenance, templates are availablewhen you create article master records.

Reference articles provide default values when you create and enhance article data.All data that has been created for the reference articles can be made available,except EANs, consumption values, forecast values, and prices and conditions (forpurchasing and sales).

The merchandise category reference article is a template for all articles createdin that merchandise category. The merchandise category reference article isautomatically determined from the merchandise category when the new articleis created. You can override this merchandise category reference article byspecifying another article as a template.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 195

Page 204: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 89: How an Article is Created

Article Types

Figure 90: Article Types

Articles with similar attributes are divided into groups and assigned to an articletype. Every article master record has to be assigned to just one article type.

196 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 205: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Article types can be defined in Customizing. Certain article types common toretail are delivered in the standard system, but these can be changed or deleted atany time, or article types can be added.

Usually the trading goods (HAWA) article type is used for articles from thenon-food and hardware area.

Figure 91: Article Types - Control Options

The article type determines:

� Which user areas (user departments) can be entered for articles of this articletype

� What type of procurement is allowed� What type of inventory management is planned for the article

(quantity/value-update)� Which stock and consumption accounts are assigned� Whether the article number is assigned internally or externally� Which fields are available in a screen and how they are to be populated� valuation details: group of valuation classes in the account category

reference; price control (moving average price, standard price)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 197

Page 206: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Number Assignment

Figure 92: Number Assignment

You have to provide a unique number every time you create an article masterrecord. There are two types of number assignment:

� Internal Number Assignment:

In this case, the SAP system assigns the numbers. The number that has beenassigned can be found within the permitted number range interval.

� External Number Assignment:

In this case, the user assigns the numbers. The intervals for externalthe number assignment check can be determined numerically andalphanumerically.

You determine the number range intervals for groups. You assign one or morearticle types to each group.

If you assign an article type to a group then you can therewith determine aninternal and an external number range interval for each article type.

If you group together several article types into one group, then you can alsodetermine an internal and an external number range interval. This means thatseveral article types can have the same number range intervals.

As an attribute of the article type, in the activity Define Attributes of Article Types,you have already determined whether or not an external number assignment is tobe checked by a number range.

198 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 207: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Figure 93: European Article Number (EAN)

Different units of measure can be used when dealing with an article. You cancreate a European Article Number (EAN) for each existing unit of measure of anarticle (order unit, delivery unit, and so on). An EAN uniquely identifies an articlein a specific unit of measure. It is also possible to assign several EANs to oneunit of measure. If you do this, one EAN needs to be flagged as the main EAN(for example, several vendors with vendor EANs for an article and a separateinternal EAN).

The EAN category controls the assignment and checking of an EAN entered in thesystem.

� The next free number is determined from the number range (in case ofinternal assignment) and a number keyed in is checked against the numberrange when an external number range was specified in the EAN category.

� The check-digit algorithm issues the check-digit in an internally assignednumber and checks the check-digit when an EAN is keyed in.

To assign perishables- and weight-EANs you must enter your own number rangesin a special number range object (EANGEWICHT) and choose the relevantcheck algorithms.

Mass Changes to Master DataThe maintenance of master data (for example for vendors or purchase orders) cantake a very long time if you have to carry out every change individually. You canedit the master data much quicker if you only have to carry out a change once,and if the system then automatically updates all data records in question. Massmaintenance tools are made available for this purpose. You can use these tools tochange a large number of master data records at once.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 199

Page 208: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 94: Mass Maintenance of Master Data

You can call such a tool from various master data transactions (for example, fromthe article master menu area) or by choosing Logistics -> Central Functions-> Mass Maintenance. If you call one of these tools from the master datamaintenance, the object type that is to be changed (for example, the customer) isalready set by default.

You call the mass maintenance tool by choosing Logistics→ Central Functions→Mass Maintenance. In this case, you must select the object that is to be changed(for example, customer or vendor). However, the mass maintenance transactionis also integrated into the individual area menus (for example, Master Data→Vendor Data→ Environment→ Mass Maintenance). In this case, the object isalready set by default.

As the next step, you select the tables that are to be changed.

You restrict the data records that are to be changed, by -for example - selecting allarticles, with their short texts containing the character string �screw�.

The system selects the data records. Depending on the number of data recordsthat are selected, the system may ask if you want to continue to work online, orif you want to execute the changes in the background. If you choose the secondoption, a workflow later informs you that the changes have been carried out. Ifyou continue to work online, the system displays the selected data records.

In the next step, select the fields that are to be changed. Enter the new value inthe relevant column, select the column header and the data records that are to bechanged, and select Change field values.

Save the changes you have made. The system carries out a consistency check forthe changed data. The system does not carry out any changes that would lead todata inconsistencies, and records this in the log. The system issues a log about the

200 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 209: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

changes that have been carried out, and about any errors that have occurred. Incertain applications, you can call up the objects that contain errors in change modeto correct the errors. To do this, select Change object.

You should only use this mass maintenance tool to change customer or vendormaster data. You do have the option of changing articles, but there are other, betterperforming mass maintenance tools. Transaction MASS_MARC is used to changelogistics data. The Integrated Mass Change (transaction WRFMASSMAT) canbe used to change other article data.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 201

Page 210: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

202 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 211: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Exercise 14: Creating Articles

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a single article for an existing merchandise category

Business ExampleYou add chocolate cookies to your assortment and therefore create a new articlemaster record in the system.

Task 1:Create an article master record for your new article.

1. The article number A1## should be assigned to the article. You create thearticle with the article type HAWA in the merchandise category RS11310(Cookies/Crackers) with the article category 00 Single Article.

2. You usually work in the Basic Data and Listing views with the distributionchain RG10/R1. To reduce the time and effort involved in this work, youwant to permanently retain this selection, which is required each time youmake changes.

3. You also want to maintain the Purchasing, Sales, Logistics: DistributionCenter, Logistics: Store, and POS views. The article is delivered by vendorRS1103 and the responsible purchasing organization is R300.

Task 2:If you confirm your entries by choosing Enter, you go to the Basic Data viewof the article.

1. The article has the description: Chocolate cookies 250g packet. Enterthis as the article short text.

2. The base unit of measure for the article is each (piece). The cookies arealways ordered in cartons containing 24 pieces. Assign the unit of measureCAR to the article with the corresponding conversion in pieces, and flagcarton as an order unit.

3. In the unit of measure EA, the cookies have a gross weight of 260 grams anda net weight of 250 grams.

You want to create measurements for packing in cartons. The carton is 60cmlong, 40cm wide and 30cm high.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 203

Page 212: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

4. Alternatively, you can purchase the cookies by the pallet. Create theappropriate unit of measure for this, so that each pallet contains 432 cartonsof cookies.

5. You use your own instore EANs for base units of measure. Let the systemassign an internal EAN. Select the EAN category provided for this unitof measure.

Task 3:Then maintain the listing view of the article.

1. In the listing view, you determine to which assortments the article shouldbe assigned.

2. Your article is going to be included in all the general assortments of thedistribution chain RG10/R1, but only if the merchandise category withthe assortment grade of the article is also assigned to the correspondingassortment.

Which listing procedure do you choose for distribution centers and for stores?

______________________________________________________

3. You copy the proposed listing period for the stores and distribution centers.However, the article is sold in stores from the 1st of the following monthuntil December 31, 9999.

4. As you have recently decided to use the general assortments for yourstores, to reduce the number of listing conditions, you do not include localassortments in your article listings.

5. You also want to decide manually for which assortments the article will belisted. Therefore you display all assortments that are proposed for listing.Now execute listing.

6. View the listing result and copy all proposed assortments.

Task 4:Now enter the purchasing data of the article.

1. Go to the Purchasing view and maintain the vendor-relevant data.

2. Which unit of measure is defaulted as the order unit of measure?

______________________________________________________

3. You want to be able to order the chocolate cookies in cartons and in pallets.Which indicator should you choose?

Continued on next page

204 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 213: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

4. The article belongs to the vendor subrange 000001 (Cookies). Whichpurchasing group is set by default? The minimum purchase order quantityfor the vendor is 5 cartons. The planned delivery time is 3 days.

5. You have negotiated a net purchasing price of USD 0.75 each with yourvendor, and you define this net purchasing price in the system.

Task 5:You now maintain all purchasing-related data of the article.

1. Call the Sales view.

2. Which purchasing price does the system default as the basis for calculatingthe sales price?

______________________________________________________

Which unit of measure is the purchasing price based on?

______________________________________________________

3. The system sets a default sales price for the article. What is this price?

______________________________________________________

4. What is the markup with which the system calculates this price?

______________________________________________________

5. You change the final price of the article to 0.89 USD/EA. What markup doesthe system calculate now?

6. You want to use the price 0.89 USD as the sales price. Ensure the indicatorfor saving the calculated prices has been set.

Task 6:You now enter the logistics data for the article.

1. Now maintain the logistics data for the distribution centers. Which RP typeis used to plan the article for distribution centers?

2. The article is ordered every Wednesday from the vendor for the distributioncenters. Which key determines this setting?

______________________________________________________

3. Now enter logistics data for the stores. To do this, go to the Logistics: storetab. Since an explicit reference store is not maintained for distribution chainRG10/R1, you must confirm the error message: There is no reference storefor distribution chain RG10/R1 and then clear the Sales Organization andDistribution Channel fields in the Validity Area dialog box.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 205

Page 214: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

4. In the stores, the article should always be ordered from a distribution centerby means of a stock transfer. Which key controls this?

______________________________________________________

Select the appropriate key for your article.

Task 7:Finally, now maintain some data especially relevant for the POS management. Todo this, choose the POS tab.

1. At the cash register, there should be a till receipt text which says: ChocolateCookies, 250g. Create this till receipt text in your own language for the unitof measure �EA�. Save your article.

Task 8:After you have created your article, you want to make some changes to yourarticle data.

1. To do this, call the article master of article A1## again.

2. Create the manufacturer EAN for the unit of measure carton. Themanufacturer EAN is a 12-digit number with a check digit in accordance withthe standard EAN check digit algorithm (a total of 13 digits). Select the EANcategory provided for this, enter the first 12 digits of the manufacturer EAN(3000000000##) and let the system default the check digit automatically.

3. Where can you enter more EANs for the unit of measure EA? What doyou have to look out for when allocating several EANs for the same unitof measure?

___________________________________________

4. Go to the Layout Modules screen and check whether your article A1##has already been assigned to a layout module. Then assign layout module4 (General module) to the article.

5. Which texts can you maintain for this article using the additional data?

___________________________________________

6. Go back to the Basic data and save your article.

206 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 215: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Solution 14: Creating ArticlesTask 1:Create an article master record for your new article.

1. The article number A1## should be assigned to the article. You create thearticle with the article type HAWA in the merchandise category RS11310(Cookies/Crackers) with the article category 00 Single Article.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Create

Article A1##

Article Type HAWA Trading goods(excl. perishables)

Merchandise Category RS11310

Article Category 00 Single article

2. You usually work in the Basic Data and Listing views with the distributionchain RG10/R1. To reduce the time and effort involved in this work, youwant to permanently retain this selection, which is required each time youmake changes.

a)

Sales Organization RG10

Distribution Channel R1

b) Choose Default Areas of Validity

c) Select the Basic Data and Listing views

d) Choose Default Views

3. You also want to maintain the Purchasing, Sales, Logistics: DistributionCenter, Logistics: Store, and POS views. The article is delivered by vendorRS1103 and the responsible purchasing organization is R300.

a) Also select the Purchasing, Sales, Logistics: Distribution Center,Logistics: Store and POS views.

Purchasing Organization R300

Vendor RS1103

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 207

Page 216: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Task 2:If you confirm your entries by choosing Enter, you go to the Basic Data viewof the article.

1. The article has the description: Chocolate cookies 250g packet. Enterthis as the article short text.

a)

Article Short Text Chocolate cookies 250gpacket

2. The base unit of measure for the article is each (piece). The cookies arealways ordered in cartons containing 24 pieces. Assign the unit of measureCAR to the article with the corresponding conversion in pieces, and flagcarton as an order unit.

a)

AUoM CAR

Number 24

LUn EA

b) To flag cartons as an order unit of measure, set the radiobutton forOUn to CAR.

3. In the unit of measure EA, the cookies have a gross weight of 260 grams anda net weight of 250 grams.

Continued on next page

208 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 217: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

You want to create measurements for packing in cartons. The carton is 60cmlong, 40cm wide and 30cm high.

a) In the field group Units of measure/EANs/dimensions, scroll acrossand for the unit of measure EA enter the following data in the relevantfields:

Gross Weight 250

Net Weight 260

Wt G

b) In the field group Units of measure/EANs/dimensions, scroll back andfor the unit of measure CAR enter the following data in the relavantfields:

Length 60

Width 40

Height 30

Unit of Dimension cm

4. Alternatively, you can purchase the cookies by the pallet. Create theappropriate unit of measure for this, so that each pallet contains 432 cartonsof cookies.

a)

AUoM PAL

Number 432

LUn EA

5. You use your own instore EANs for base units of measure. Let the systemassign an internal EAN. Select the EAN category provided for this unitof measure.

a) In the Ct field, enter IE for unit of measure EA.

b) Check screen data

c) Confirm the warning message by choosing Check screen data

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 209

Page 218: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Task 3:Then maintain the listing view of the article.

1. In the listing view, you determine to which assortments the article shouldbe assigned.

a) Go to the Listing tab

2. Your article is going to be included in all the general assortments of thedistribution chain RG10/R1, but only if the merchandise category withthe assortment grade of the article is also assigned to the correspondingassortment.

Which listing procedure do you choose for distribution centers and for stores?

______________________________________________________

a)

LP for store categories B1LP for distribution centercategory

B1

3. You copy the proposed listing period for the stores and distribution centers.However, the article is sold in stores from the 1st of the following monthuntil December 31, 9999.

a)

For sale from <1st of the followingmonth>

For sale till December 31, 9999

4. As you have recently decided to use the general assortments for yourstores, to reduce the number of listing conditions, you do not include localassortments in your article listings.

a) Deselect the Local Assortments Also checkbox

5. You also want to decide manually for which assortments the article will belisted. Therefore you display all assortments that are proposed for listing.Now execute listing.

a) Select the Maint. assorts man. checkbox

b) Choose Execute Listing

6. View the listing result and copy all proposed assortments.

a) Choose CopyContinued on next page

210 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 219: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Task 4:Now enter the purchasing data of the article.

1. Go to the Purchasing view and maintain the vendor-relevant data.

a) Go to the Purchasing tab

2. Which unit of measure is defaulted as the order unit of measure?

______________________________________________________

a) Order Unit Carton (CAR)

3. You want to be able to order the chocolate cookies in cartons and in pallets.Which indicator should you choose?

a) Variable Order Unit = 1

4. The article belongs to the vendor subrange 000001 (Cookies). Whichpurchasing group is set by default? The minimum purchase order quantityfor the vendor is 5 cartons. The planned delivery time is 3 days.

a)

Vendor 000001Minimum Qty 5Pl. Deliv. Time 3PurchasingGroup R30

5. You have negotiated a net purchasing price of USD 0.75 each with yourvendor, and you define this net purchasing price in the system.

a)

Net Price 0.75 USD each

Task 5:You now maintain all purchasing-related data of the article.

1. Call the Sales view.

a) Go to the Sales tab

2. Which purchasing price does the system default as the basis for calculatingthe sales price?

______________________________________________________

Which unit of measure is the purchasing price based on?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 211

Page 220: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

______________________________________________________

a) Net purchasing price = 0.75 USD, based on the base unit ofmeasure EA.

3. The system sets a default sales price for the article. What is this price?

______________________________________________________

a) The proposed final price is 0.99 USD/EA.

4. What is the markup with which the system calculates this price?

______________________________________________________

a) 32%

5. You change the final price of the article to 0.89 USD/EA. What markup doesthe system calculate now?

a)

Final price 0.89

The new markup is now 18.667%.

6. You want to use the price 0.89 USD as the sales price. Ensure the indicatorfor saving the calculated prices has been set.

a) Set the Save Calculated Price indicator.

Task 6:You now enter the logistics data for the article.

1. Now maintain the logistics data for the distribution centers. Which RP typeis used to plan the article for distribution centers?

a) Logistics: DC tab, RP Parameters subscreen.

RP Type R1= Time-phased planning

2. The article is ordered every Wednesday from the vendor for the distributioncenters. Which key determines this setting?

______________________________________________________

a) In the Stock planner/replenishment data subscreen:

Planning cycle P02 = Order Day Wednesday

Continued on next page

212 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 221: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

3. Now enter logistics data for the stores. To do this, go to the Logistics: storetab. Since an explicit reference store is not maintained for distribution chainRG10/R1, you must confirm the error message: There is no reference storefor distribution chain RG10/R1 and then clear the Sales Organization andDistribution Channel fields in the Validity Area dialog box.

a) Logistics: store tab

b) Confirm the error message by choosing Enter and then clear the SalesOrganization and Distribution Channel fields in the Validity Areadialog box.

4. In the stores, the article should always be ordered from a distribution centerby means of a stock transfer. Which key controls this?

______________________________________________________

Select the appropriate key for your article.

a) Go to the Stock planner/replenishment data subscreen

Supply source 2 (Stock Transfer)

This means that an internal supply source (a distribution center) isrequired in the case of procurement transactions for stores.

Task 7:Finally, now maintain some data especially relevant for the POS management. Todo this, choose the POS tab.

1. At the cash register, there should be a till receipt text which says: ChocolateCookies, 250g. Create this till receipt text in your own language for the unitof measure �EA�. Save your article.

a)

Language EN

AUn EA

Till receipt Chocolate cookies,250g

b) Article→ Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 213

Page 222: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Task 8:After you have created your article, you want to make some changes to yourarticle data.

1. To do this, call the article master of article A1## again.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Data→Material→ Change

Article A1##

2. Create the manufacturer EAN for the unit of measure carton. Themanufacturer EAN is a 12-digit number with a check digit in accordance withthe standard EAN check digit algorithm (a total of 13 digits). Select the EANcategory provided for this, enter the first 12 digits of the manufacturer EAN(3000000000##) and let the system default the check digit automatically.

a) For the unit of measure Carton in EAN/UPC, enter 3000000000##.

b) For Ct enter HE

c) Select the indicator AP (determine check digit for EAN automatically)

d) Choose Check Screen Data

3. Where can you enter more EANs for the unit of measure EA? What doyou have to look out for when allocating several EANs for the same unitof measure?

___________________________________________

a) Choose Additional data and go to the Additional EANs tab.

b) One EAN for each unit of measure must be selected as the main EAN(indicator: M).

4. Go to the Layout Modules screen and check whether your article A1##has already been assigned to a layout module. Then assign layout module4 (General module) to the article.

a) Choose Additional Data and the go to the Layout Modules tab.

Alt. Unit EA

Layout Module 4

5. Which texts can you maintain for this article using the additional data?

___________________________________________

a) Short text, Basic data text, Sales text, Inspection text

Continued on next page

214 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 223: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

6. Go back to the Basic data and save your article.

a) Choose Main Data

b) Material→ Save

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 215

Page 224: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

216 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 225: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Exercise 15: - optional

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Define internal number range intervals for EANs� Define the attributes of the EAN� Use the EAN in the article master

Business ExampleIn future, you would also like to manage self-defined EANs for your article in thesystem.

Task 1:Define a new EAN category that is to use its own number range.

1. Firstly, you need to create a number range for the EANs you define yourself.As the interval number, select 20+ <your group number ##>; the intervalareas are defined as follows:

Group 01 10000101 - 10000200Group 02 10000201 - 10000300Group 03 10000301 - 10000400Group 04 10000401 - 10000500Group 05 10000501 - 10000600Group 06 10000601 - 10000700Group 07 10000701 - 10000800Group 08 10000801 - 10000900Group 09 10000901 - 10001000Group 10 10001001 - 10001100Group 11 10001101 - 10001200Group 12 10001201 - 10001300Group 13 10001301 - 10001400Group 14 10001401 - 10001500Group 15 10001501 - 10001600

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 217

Page 226: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Group 16 10001601 - 10001700Group 17 10001701 - 10001800Group 18 10001801 - 10001900

The inserted number range interval must be assigned internally.

Hint: When you save, a transport system message appears that youcan ignore by choosing Enter.

What does the current number field mean? Use the F1 Help to make a noteof this.

2. You now wish to create your own EAN category. The EAN category numbercorresponds to your group number: Your EAN category has the descriptionTest EAN Group##.

The number range object for your EAN should be EUROPARTNR and youshould use the number range created under 1 as the internal number range.Enter the standard EAN check digit algorithm as the check digit algorithm.

Task 2:You now want to use the EAN category you just created to assign your ownEANs to your articles.

1. Create the new unit of measure PAC for the article A1## (1 PAC [pack] =72 pc [pieces]).

2. Assign the EAN category that you created to the new unit of measure. Onlycheck the EAN that is set by default. Do not save the change to your article.

218 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 227: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Solution 15: - optionalTask 1:Define a new EAN category that is to use its own number range.

1. Firstly, you need to create a number range for the EANs you define yourself.As the interval number, select 20+ <your group number ##>; the intervalareas are defined as follows:

Group 01 10000101 - 10000200Group 02 10000201 - 10000300Group 03 10000301 - 10000400Group 04 10000401 - 10000500Group 05 10000501 - 10000600Group 06 10000601 - 10000700Group 07 10000701 - 10000800Group 08 10000801 - 10000900Group 09 10000901 - 10001000Group 10 10001001 - 10001100Group 11 10001101 - 10001200Group 12 10001201 - 10001300Group 13 10001301 - 10001400Group 14 10001401 - 10001500Group 15 10001501 - 10001600Group 16 10001601 - 10001700Group 17 10001701 - 10001800Group 18 10001801 - 10001900

The inserted number range interval must be assigned internally.

Hint: When you save, a transport system message appears that youcan ignore by choosing Enter.

What does the current number field mean? Use the F1 Help to make a noteof this.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 219

Page 228: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Settings for KeyFields→ International Article Numbers (EANs)→ Define NumberRanges for EANs/UPCs

b) Choose Change intervals→ Edit→ Insert interval

As the interval number, select 20+ <your group number ##>;the interval areas are defined as follows:

Group 01 10000101 - 10000200Group 02 10000201 - 10000300Group 03 10000301 - 10000400Group 04 10000401 - 10000500Group 05 10000501 - 10000600Group 06 10000601 - 10000700Group 07 10000701 - 10000800Group 08 10000801 - 10000900Group 09 10000901 - 10001000Group 10 10001001 - 10001100Group 11 10001101 - 10001200Group 12 10001201 - 10001300Group 13 10001301 - 10001400Group 14 10001401 - 10001500Group 15 10001501 - 10001600Group 16 10001601 - 10001700Group 17 10001701 - 10001800Group 18 10001801 - 10001900

c) Do NOT select the Ext checkbox.

d) What is the significance of the Current number field (F1)? In the caseof internal number range intervals, the Current number field containsthe last number that was assigned last.

e) Use F3 (green arrow) to go back.

f) Save

Hint: When you save, a transport system message appears;choose Enter to confirm it.

Continued on next page

220 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 229: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

2. You now wish to create your own EAN category. The EAN category numbercorresponds to your group number: Your EAN category has the descriptionTest EAN Group##.

The number range object for your EAN should be EUROPARTNR and youshould use the number range created under 1 as the internal number range.Enter the standard EAN check digit algorithm as the check digit algorithm.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Settings for KeyFields→ International Article Numbers (EANs)→ Define Attributesof EANs/UPCs

b) Choose New Entries

c) Make the following entries:

EAN Category ##

Description EAN Group ##

Number range object EUROPARTNR

Int. number range <number range created under1>

Check-digit algor. 1

d) Table View→ Save

Task 2:You now want to use the EAN category you just created to assign your ownEANs to your articles.

1. Create the new unit of measure PAC for the article A1## (1 PAC [pack] =72 pc [pieces]).

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Data→Material→ Change

b) Select the Basic data view.

c) In the Units of measure/EANs/dimensions field group:

AUoM PAC

Number 72

LUn EA

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 221

Page 230: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

2. Assign the EAN category that you created to the new unit of measure. Onlycheck the EAN that is set by default. Do not save the change to your article.

a) Enter the EAN category ## in the Ct field

b) Choose Enter

c) Check that the number range interval that you created is now taken intoaccount and that the check number is correct.

Do NOT save the entries you have made.

222 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 231: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating Articles

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create an article master record� Name the various article categories� Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the

organizational units� Maintain the individual views in the article master

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 223

Page 232: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Lesson OverviewUsing the different options for article fast entry

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� List the integrated mass maintenance options� Describe what the article core master data is� Explain how you can use the maintenance groups� Explain the use of the article monitor� Describe the different ways of copying the article

Business ExampleYou work as a purchasing agent in a company and are also responsible formaintaining articles. You should be able to create and change articles as efficientlyas possible.

Article Core Master DataArticle core master data are regular articles that are generated by an externalapplication. In this way, for example, this function is integrated into the SAPRetail Purchase Order Manager function. This means that the user can createmissing articles without exiting from the purchase order function. When therelevant settings are made, these articles only have the article segments or articledata that is required in the purchase order.

Figure 95: Article Core Master Data: Definition

224 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 233: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

To be able to use such articles in all functions, they must be completed. Todistinguish between articles that were generated with the standard function, youshould flag core master data with an entry in the Creation Status field on the Basicdata view of the article (Table MARA). You can use this status to select articlecore master data directly in the article monitor for the further processing.

Figure 96: Article Core Master Data: Maintenance

Maintenance GroupsMaintenance groups are required to create article core master data and to maintainarticles via integrated of the mass maintenance.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 225

Page 234: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 97: Maintenance Groups: Definition

A maintenance group contains a number of fields that can be maintained. InCustomizing, the fields are grouped together into field groups according totheir dependencies. A field group contains all fields that must be maintainedtogether. For example, you can maintain the cross-site maintenance status and thecorresponding date at the same time; this means that both fields are assignedto a field group.

You have the option of creating customer-specific field groups.

In order to achieve an application-specific separation of the fields to be maintained,for each application one or more maintenance groups can be created. Differentfield groups can be assigned to these maintenance groups. Field groups can beassigned to several maintenance groups.

For each maintenance group, one or more templates can be created, in whichdefault values are maintained for the fields in the field group. To uniquely identifyarticle core master data, a template should be used to assign a value in the CreationStatus field. This creation status is used in the article monitor to select article coremaster data that must be completed.

226 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 235: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Figure 98: Ways to use Maintenance Groups

Maintenance groups make it easier to edit or display articles by restricting thenumber of available fields.

You can use maintenance groups to define - via the assigned field groups - whichfields are used or displayed in individual applications.

� When processing Article Core Master Data and in the Integrated MassChange, you use maintenance groups to, for example, flexibly define thefields that are displayed for processing.

� In the Article List and in the Article Monitor, you use maintenance groups to,for example, determine fields that are displayed in the results list.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 227

Page 236: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 99: Mass Maintenance of Master Data

You can call such a tool from various master data transactions (for example, fromthe article master, the markdown planning master, and so on) or by choosingLogistics -> Central Functions -> Mass Maintenance. If you call one of thesetools from the master data maintenance, the object type that is to be changed (forexample, the customer) is already preconfigured.

You call the mass maintenance tool by choosing Logistics→ Central Functions→Mass Maintenance. In this case, you must select the object that is to be changed(for example, customer or vendor). However, the mass maintenance transactionis also integrated into the individual area menus (for example, Master Data→Vendor Data→ Environment→ Mass Maintenance). In this case, the object isalready set by default.

Then select the tables that are to be changed.

You restrict the data records that are to be changed, by - for example - searchingfor all articles, the short text of which contains the character string �bolt�.

The system selects the data records. Depending on the number of data recordsthat are found, the system asks if you want to continue to work online, or if youwant to execute the changes in the background. If you choose the second option, aworkflow later informs you that the changes have been carried out. If you continueto work online, the system displays the selected data records.

Now select the tables that are to be changed. Enter the new value in the relevantcolumn, select the column header and the data records that are to be changedand select Change field values.

Save the changes you have made. The system carries out a consistency check forthe changed data. The system does not carry out any changes that would lead todata inconsistencies, and records this in the log. The system issues a log about the

228 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 237: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

changes that have been carried out, and about any errors that have occurred. Incertain applications, you can call up the objects that contain errors in change modeto correct the errors. To do this, select Change Object.

You should only use this mass maintenance tool to change customer or vendormaster data. You do have the option of changing articles too, but there are other,better performing mass maintenance tools for this purpose.

Transaction MASS_MARC is used to change logistics data.

You can use the IntegratedMass Change transaction (transactionWRFMASSMAT)to change other article data.

Integrated Mass Change

� The integrated mass change is a simple and quick way of changing existingarticles.

� The maintenance dialog allows you to change basic article data andadditional data, such as info records.

� The changeable fields are restricted when you use maintenance groups.

The structure of the integrated mass change is based on the structure of thelogistics/replenishment mass maintenance. The fields that are to be changed aredetermined by a maintenance group. Every field is assigned to a maintenancelevel, and here the maintenance levels correspond to the article master viewsBasic Data/Purchasing/Sales/Logistics/POS. After you selected the articles thatare relevant for the change, the maintenance levels are displayed on the left-handside of the screen. The currentlz maintained organization levels for the selectedarticles are displayed as sublevels of the maintenance levels in question. In otherwords, if the selected article is maintained for the distribution chain RG10/R1 andRG10/R5, the maintenance level Sales has the sublevels RG10/R1 and RG10/R5.After you select a maintenance or sublevel, the relevant articles appear in listformat on the right-hand side of the screen.

You can execute the integrated mass change as an independent function or fromother functions, for example from the article monitor.

Only the integrated mass maintenance application gives you the option oftemporarily changing maintenance groups, which means that you can addadditional changeable fields.

You can also create a user-specific default maintenance group for the massmaintenance.

Article MonitorThe article monitor makes it easier to promptly add further master data to thearticle core master data, which means that it can be operatively used as a completearticle in all applications.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 229

Page 238: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 100: Article Monitor

Restrictions are defined in a selection screen, in order to select certain article coremaster data. The result is displayed in a list, in which the columns are determinedby a maintenance group. To complete the article, you can navigate from this listto the new mass maintenance, the article type change transaction or the articlemaintenance transaction. An article list can also be generated from the selectedarticle core master data.

Article CopyYou can use this function to copy article master records to create new articlemaster records or change existing ones. In addition to the main article data, youcan also copy additional master data, such as purchasing info records, purchasingand sales conditions, bills of material, and replenishment data.

� The article copy function allows you to simply and quickly create newarticles on the basis of the data of a source article.

� In contrast to creating a new article using a reference article, the article copyfunction allows you to either copy all data or to restrict the copy to certainsegments (the only restriction is that pricing reference articles are not copied).

The article copy function gives you the option of copying a source article with allcreated segments and data, thereby creating an identical article. You can then usetransaction MM42 to change this article (for example, the article text). Pricingreference articles in generic articles and EANs are not copied.

230 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 239: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Figure 101: Article Copy Options

When you create and change article master records, you can determine which dataof the source article the system copies.

You have the following options when copying articles:

� Copying a source article

All field values of the selected segments are copied.

� Copying a source article with no different fields

Copying all field values of the source article with no differences at variantor site level.

� Individual control of the segments to be copied

The copy volume is defined by restricting specific segments, for example,info records, listing conditions or prices.

Follow-Up/Replacement ArticleYou can assign one or more follow-up articles, and one or more replacementarticles, to an article (the original article). A follow-up article permanentlyreplaces an original article, while a replacement article only replaces an originalarticle for a certain period of time.

You can carry out this assignment at different levels, via local assortments for asite and via general assortments for a group of sites or for all sites.

You can display, change and delete existing assignments of follow-up orreplacement articles to original articles.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 231

Page 240: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Articles or article core master data must be created for all articles that are to beassigned. Original articles and follow-up and replacement articles are activearticles, in other words they are not logically deleted at basic data level.

Original articles and follow-up and replacement articles do not belong to thefollowing article categories:

� Generic articles� Merchandise category value-only articles� Merchandise category hierarchy value-only articles� Group value-only articles� Merchandise category reference articles

In Customizing, define follow-up categories for follow-up and replacementarticles and define which checks the system carries out. You can find theCustomizing of the follow-up categories in the Implementation Guide (IMG)Logistics - General under Material Master→ Retail-Specific Settings→ Settingsfor Follow-Up/Replacement Material→ Maintain Follow-Up Categories.

232 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 241: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Exercise 16: Article Fast Entry

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create article core master data� Explain how you can use the maintenance groups� Use the article monitor� Describe the integrated mass maintenance� Carry out the article copy

Business ExampleYou often create core master data. Since you only create data for one vendor anda certain merchandise category, you prepopulate these fields in the maintenancegroup with which you create core master data.

Afterwards you create core master data that is completed via the article monitor.Then you also copy another existing article.

Task 1: Maintenance GroupsAnswer the following questions:

1. The following fields are grouped together in a maintenance group.Choose the correct answer(s).□ A All article master fields□ B Only fields that are required for a certain application□ C Only basic data fields□ D Basic and logistics data

2. You want to create a template for an existing maintenance group, so thatcertain fields are already prepopulated when you create a core article withthis maintenance group.

To do this, go to the maintenance transaction of the maintenance groups.

3. Create a template for your maintenance groupMG## and enter the followingvalues:

Article Type FASH

Creation Status 01

Merchandise Category RF1T0##

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 233

Page 242: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Info record category 0

Vendor R1TV01##

Purchasing Organization R300

4. Save the entries you have made.

Task 2: Core Master DataAnswer the following questions:

1. Core master data can ...Choose the correct answer(s).□ A ... Only be created out of an application.□ B ... Only be created by a separate transaction.□ C ... Be created from an application and by means of a separate

transaction.□ D There is no core master data creation function.

2. Use the maintenance group, to which you just added a template, to create acore article master record (single article).

Select the master data transaction to do this. Under Units of Measure, viewthe data that was copied from the reference article or from the template.Maintain another unit of measure and select it as order unit.

Change the article description of the article in the Descriptions view inarticle Group ##. Then make sure to choose Enter. List the article in thegeneral assortment R1KIDSS## and maintain the season (0001) and the nextyear as a season year. Choose Yes to confirm the dialog box that informs youthat the listing data is adjusted. Assign it to the hierarchy node with thedescription School ## (use the search help to search for the relevant ID).Save the core article and make a note of the number.

___________________________________________________

Continued on next page

234 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 243: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Task 3: Article Monitor and Mass MaintenanceYou now deal with the article monitor.

Answer the following questions:

1. In the Article Monitor you can ...Choose the correct answer(s).□ A ... Change articles□ B ... Navigate to the article maintenance (MM42)□ C ... Navigate to the integrated mass maintenance□ D ... Navigate to the purchasing info record maintenance

2. A maintenance group must be selected in the integrated mass maintenance.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

3. You can use the integrated mass maintenance to create new articles or newarticle segments.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

4. Call the article monitor to complete the article core master record that hasjust been created, and other core articles that are to be completed. As aselection criterion, use the articles R1TA24##, R1TA30##, R1TA31## andthe number of the core article that has just been created.

5. Amongst other things, the article that you created in the previous exerciseis displayed in the results list. You navigate from the list to the massmaintenance.

6. In the Mass Maintenance, select a maintenance group, by means of whichyou decide which fields can be changed. You want to change basic andlogistics data.

7. Execute the selection to determine which articles can be changed. In theBasic Data view, change the creation status 01 to blank and maintain thefashion grade 0001 high fashion.

Check the Assortment List Type (it should be F) and the TransportationGroup and Loading Group fields (it should be 0001 in both cases).

In the Logistics: Distribution Center view for the Reference-DC P100, enterthe distribution profile FT2 and check that the RP type is ND.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 235

Page 244: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Save the entries you have made.

Task 4: Article copyAnswer the following questions:

1. When you copy an article, ...Choose the correct answer(s).□ A ... Always copy the whole article□ B ... Only ever copy individual segments□ C ... Decide which data you want to copy□ D ... You can also copy listing and pricing conditions.

Task 5:Your vendor offers you children's trousers for a low price. These trousers aresimilar to children's trousers that you already carry and that sell well. You acceptyour vendor's offer and maintain article master data for the new pants.

You use the pants, which are already in your assortment, as the copy template.However, only certain variants are copied, since the new pants are delivered infewer colours.

1. You copy the source article R1TA03## with all article data, but you restrictthe variants to the colours red and royal blue. The article number should beR1TA99##. Copy the article.

2. Change the article short text of the new article to Children's Pants##

236 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 245: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Solution 16: Article Fast EntryTask 1: Maintenance GroupsAnswer the following questions:

1. The following fields are grouped together in a maintenance group.

Answer: B

Only fields that are required for a certain application are grouped together ina maintenance group.

2. You want to create a template for an existing maintenance group, so thatcertain fields are already prepopulated when you create a core article withthis maintenance group.

To do this, go to the maintenance transaction of the maintenance groups.

a) In transactionWRFMGROUP, select your maintenance groups in thetree, choose Change Mode and then Show/Hide.

3. Create a template for your maintenance groupMG## and enter the followingvalues:

Article Type FASH

Creation Status 01

Merchandise Category RF1T0##

Info record category 0

Vendor R1TV01##

Purchasing Organization R300

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Manage Maintenance Groups

b) TransactionWRFMGROUP: In the tree, under the Cross-Applicationnode, select your maintenance group MG##.

c) Choose Change Mode and then Show/Hide. A subscreen appears,which can be used to maintain templates. Enter values in theaforementioned fields.

4. Save the entries you have made.

a) Choose Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 237

Page 246: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Task 2: Core Master DataAnswer the following questions:

1. Core master data can ...

Answer: C

Core master data can be created from an application and by means of aseparate transaction.

2. Use the maintenance group, to which you just added a template, to create acore article master record (single article).

Select the master data transaction to do this. Under Units of Measure, viewthe data that was copied from the reference article or from the template.Maintain another unit of measure and select it as order unit.

Change the article description of the article in the Descriptions view inarticle Group ##. Then make sure to choose Enter. List the article in thegeneral assortment R1KIDSS## and maintain the season (0001) and the nextyear as a season year. Choose Yes to confirm the dialog box that informs youthat the listing data is adjusted. Assign it to the hierarchy node with thedescription School ## (use the search help to search for the relevant ID).Save the core article and make a note of the number.

___________________________________________________

a) Path: SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ ArticleData→ Article→ Process Core Master Data

b) TransactionWRFMATBODY

c) Use the F4 help to select your maintenance groupMG## and thecorresponding Template 0001.

d) The data for the article type, merchandise category and other fields ispreassigned. Choose Enter.

e) The views for which data can be maintained are displayed on theleft-hand side. Select Units of Measure. The data from the referencearticle is proposed, and displayed in the right-hand screen area.

f) Enter another unit of measure (for example, carton) and select it as anorder unit by selecting the relevant checkbox.

g) Select the Descriptions view and overwrite the description in theright-hand column for the language EN.

h) Proceed in this way in the other views, and maintain the required valueson the right-hand side of the screen. Save the article.

Continued on next page

238 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 247: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Task 3: Article Monitor and Mass MaintenanceYou now deal with the article monitor.

Answer the following questions:

1. In the Article Monitor you can ...

Answer: B, C

In the article monitor, you can navigate to the article maintenance (MM42)and to the integrated mass maintenance.

2. A maintenance group must be selected in the integrated mass maintenance.

Answer: False

If no maintenance group is selected, the system uses a default maintenancegroup.

3. You can use the integrated mass maintenance to create new articles or newarticle segments.

Answer: False

This is not possible.

4. Call the article monitor to complete the article core master record that hasjust been created, and other core articles that are to be completed. As aselection criterion, use the articles R1TA24##, R1TA30##, R1TA31## andthe number of the core article that has just been created.

a) Path: SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ ArticleData→ Article→ Material Monitor.

b) TransactionWRFMATMON

c) Enter your articles R1TA24##, R1TA30##, R1TA31## and thecore article in the General Article Data subscreen for the selection ofthe article and choose Execute.

5. Amongst other things, the article that you created in the previous exerciseis displayed in the results list. You navigate from the list to the massmaintenance.

a) Select the articles and chooseMass Maintenance.

6. In the Mass Maintenance, select a maintenance group, by means of whichyou decide which fields can be changed. You want to change basic andlogistics data.

a) Choose Select Maintenance Group and use the F4 Help to select anapplication-specific maintenance group for the mass maintenance.The description of the maintenance group isMass Changes Basic +Logistics Data

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 239

Page 248: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

7. Execute the selection to determine which articles can be changed. In theBasic Data view, change the creation status 01 to blank and maintain thefashion grade 0001 high fashion.

Check the Assortment List Type (it should be F) and the TransportationGroup and Loading Group fields (it should be 0001 in both cases).

In the Logistics: Distribution Center view for the Reference-DC P100, enterthe distribution profile FT2 and check that the RP type is ND.

Save the entries you have made.

a) Copy the articles into the matrix by double-clicking the Basic Dataview in the left-hand screen area. There select the articles that shouldbe changed and choose Fast Entry.

b) A new subscreen opens in the lower screen area. Maintain the relevantvalues there. Select the lines and choose Enter.

c) On the left-hand side of the screen, choose Logistics: DistributionCenter and the reference distribution center P100. In the right-handscreen area, change the corresponding values.

d) Save the entries you have made. When you save, the changes madeat the reference distribution center level are transferred to dependentdistribution centers, provided that these are not already filled withdifferent values.

Task 4: Article copyAnswer the following questions:

1. When you copy an article, ...

Answer: C, D

You can decide which data you want to copy, and you can also copy listingand pricing conditions.

Continued on next page

240 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 249: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Task 5:Your vendor offers you children's trousers for a low price. These trousers aresimilar to children's trousers that you already carry and that sell well. You acceptyour vendor's offer and maintain article master data for the new pants.

You use the pants, which are already in your assortment, as the copy template.However, only certain variants are copied, since the new pants are delivered infewer colours.

1. You copy the source article R1TA03## with all article data, but you restrictthe variants to the colours red and royal blue. The article number should beR1TA99##. Copy the article.

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Copy

b) TransactionWRFMATCOPY

c) The article R1TA03## is used as the source article and the numberR1TA99## is entered as the target article. You do not have to maintainany other data in the Target Material subscreen, since everything iscopied from the Source Article. The Underlying Material Data and theAdditional Material Data checkboxes are set. However, you chooseVariant Filters to select the variants of the colours red and royalblue only.

d) Choose Execute.

2. Change the article short text of the new article to Children's Pants##

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Change

b) Transaction MM42

c) Enter the article number R1TA99##, select the Basic data view andchoose Enter. Change the short text to Children's Pants##.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 241

Page 250: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� List the integrated mass maintenance options� Describe what the article core master data is� Explain how you can use the maintenance groups� Explain the use of the article monitor� Describe the different ways of copying the article

242 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 251: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: PRICAT

Lesson: PRICAT

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you are introduced to the price catalog as a tool for copying articleand price information from the vendor to the SAP system.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICATfunction

� Edit a PRICAT catalog item� Post a PRICAT catalog item

Business ExampleYou want your vendor to carry out the majority of the data maintenance, andtherefore you obtain the article data from a data pool. You receive sensitive datadirectly from your vendor and not from the data pool.

Before it is posted to your SAP system, you want to check the data that the vendorhas provided.

PRICAT: DefinitionPRICAT processing refers to the function used to transfer article and priceinformation in a standard format.

The information can be sent to the retailer bilaterally directly from the vendor, ormultilaterally by means of a data pool.

The business process allows you to import the logical message typePRICECATALOGUE02. This means you can receive information about newarticles or changes to existing articles from a vendor or a data pool. Theinformation is stored in a catalog in the SAP system. The individual catalog itemscorrespond to an SAP article. The catalog items contain the description, conditions(including taxes), and logistics information about the articles.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 243

Page 252: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Challenges

� The data from an external data pool or from the vendor does not contain allSAP-relevant information, in other words, it was necessary to find a way ofenhancing data generically.

� Large quantities of data must be displayed clearly and must be easy to edit.� It must be possible to create different SAP article categories (structured

articles, generic articles, and individual articles) from individual data records.

Just one catalog of a vendor is edited at a time. The data of the price catalog, whichis hierarchically structured from the viewpoint of the data model, is displayed in aflat view. Generic articles, single articles and bills of material can be displayedand processed. Variants of a generic article and components of bills of materialsthat belong together are displayed in a block.

PRICAT inbound

Figure 102: Process: PRICAT inbound

244 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 253: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: PRICAT

Figure 103: Customizing

From transaction W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN you can navigate to the defaults anddata merging maintenance. At client level, the default table is implemented as aCustomizing table, since changes have extensive consequences. However, theClient-Vendor and Client-Vendor, Merchandise Category levels are applicationtables, and the business requirement is to be able to change these tables in theoperative system. The default and merging logic can be controlled for each field ofthe PRICAT data pool. The settings of the fine granular level override the settingsof the higher level. Besides the selection of fields which the system displays inonline processing and their display settings (e.g. ready for input), you also chooseone of five possible storage options, which determine how each PRICAT poolfield should be populated. The defaults and enhancement logic is used for both theonline processing and batch posting.

Online ProcessingThe online processing was completely redeveloped for ERP2005 and now:

� There is a new dialog interface for the mass data processing� Scheduled transfer of data to the R/3 master data is possible� Additional PRICAT information, such as generic articles and prices, is now

transferred

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 245

Page 254: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 104: Online

When new generic articles are created, one variant must be selected as mastervariant, from which the data is then copied for the generic article header leveland displayed in an extra line. If a generic article (header) is already created, itis displayed in a separate master data line with the hat symbol. Some fields arenot displayed in the PRICAT item display, but they can be reached and editedby clicking on the relevant hotspots (for example, the valid-to date of a pricecondition). There are hotspots for prices, texts, characteristics, units of measureand bills of material. 1 to n columns and 1 to m rows can be selected at thesame time. If you choose Mass Maintenance, a dialog box appears on which theselected column names appear again and in which you can enter the required fieldcontents. The field contents are then copied into all lines of the selected columns.If the available selection criteria in transaction W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN: Catalognumber, EAN of base UoM, valid-from date, and processing status are notsufficient, a selection report can be generated, the further selection fields ofwhich can be selected within the framework of the report generation. The requiredselection reports should be generated at the start of a project, for example, by therelevant consultant, but not by the end user.

The upper section of the selection screen is static and is always available. Theselection fields, which were chosen when the selection report was created, appearin the lower section of the screen. The selection report that applies for a userdepends on the profile (on the start screen of W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN). In thatprofile for the online processing you determine the selection report and variant thatis used. For each PRICAT-EAN, the current article master record can be displayedin a separate line. The same applies for the original data record that was sent fromthe pool. Changed fields can be highlighted in color.

246 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 255: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: PRICAT

Figure 105: Online Processing

As soon as you start the process for updating the article master, a padlock symbolappears. After you choose Refresh, you can tell - from the processing status and atraffic light symbol - whether or not posting occurred without problems. A clickon the traffic light symbol opens a log that contains error messages.

Figure 106: Posting

The condition technique is used to create prices for all distribution chains in thesystem and for all purchasing organizations of the vendor, provided no restrictionsare defined in online processing and that a corresponding data retention level(condition table) for the organizational level is maintained in Customizing.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 247

Page 256: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 107: Reorganization

248 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 257: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: PRICAT

Exercise 17: PRICAT

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Use the PRICAT function to transfer article and price information

Business ExampleBefore a new season starts, your vendor provides a new catalog with items in adata pool. You copy this data into your SAP system by means of the PRICATinterface, but you want to check and edit the items before you create them asarticles in your system.

Task 1:Answer the following questions:

1. The PRICAT function is used to copy ...Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Article data□ B Prices□ C Purchasing data□ D Site data

2. The PRICAT function can be used to create generic articles.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

Task 2:

1. You create your own profile ## to edit the catalog items in the onlineprocessing. Specify that you want to display the lines with the originalcatalog data and the article master. Changes between these lines and thework item line should be highlighted in color.

2. Now view the defaults maintained at client and vendor level. Which fieldsare prepopulated with fixed values?

3. Specify the profile you have just created and access the online processing.Use the F4 Help to select the catalog for your vendor R1TV01## and chooseExecute.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 249

Page 258: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

4. Dialog: Create your own user-specific layout with the name LA## and thedescription Layout##, and add the columns for the article hierarchy ID andthe article hierarchy node.

5. Check if the layout has changed, and that you can see the columns for thearticle hierarchy ID and the article hierarchy node.

6. Change the sales price of an item and save the entries. Exit from the catalog.

7. Call the catalog again and check whether the change was saved.

8. Now post a single article. Check the status and the traffic light.

250 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 259: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: PRICAT

Solution 17: PRICATTask 1:Answer the following questions:

1. The PRICAT function is used to copy ...

Answer: A, B, C

Article data, prices and purchasing data are copied with the PRICAT function.

2. The PRICAT function can be used to create generic articles.

Answer: True

The PRICAT function can be used to create generic articles.

Task 2:

1. You create your own profile ## to edit the catalog items in the onlineprocessing. Specify that you want to display the lines with the originalcatalog data and the article master. Changes between these lines and thework item line should be highlighted in color.

a) Choose IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Electronic Data Interchange-> PRICAT Inbound -> Configure Online Processing

b) Choose New Entries to enter a new profile. Enter the ID and thedescription. Set Incl. Art.Mast and the Incl. Original checkboxes.

c) Under Compare, specify 3 - Compare with Original and MaterialMaster; under Layout, specify 2 - Item and Units of Measure (SplitScreen) and under Save Variant, specify U - Only as User-SpecificVariant.

2. Now view the defaults maintained at client and vendor level. Which fieldsare prepopulated with fixed values?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Price Catalog Inbound Processing→Maintain Price Catalog

b) Then choose Environment -> Default -> Field Catalog or FieldCatalog: ILN/Vendor to navigate to transactionW_PRICAT_PRE1orW_PRICAT_PRE2.

c) The Valuation Class and Article Type fields are prepopulated at clientlevel. The Article Hierarchy ID and Article Hierarchy Node fieldsare prepopulated at vendor level.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 251

Page 260: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

3. Specify the profile you have just created and access the online processing.Use the F4 Help to select the catalog for your vendor R1TV01## and chooseExecute.

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Price Catalog Inbound Processing→Maintain Price Catalog

b) TransactionW_PRICAT_MAINTAIN

c) Specify the profile ## and choose Execute.

d) In the following selection screen, select a catalog by choosing the F4Help on the Price Catalog field. Restrict the search to your vendorR1TV01##, or display all catalogs and then select the catalog of yourvendor by double-clicking it.

e) Choose Execute to navigate to the online processing.

4. Dialog: Create your own user-specific layout with the name LA## and thedescription Layout##, and add the columns for the article hierarchy ID andthe article hierarchy node.

a) Choose Select Layout, and then choose Change Layout from the list.

b) Copy the Article Hierarchy ID and the Article Hierarchy Node columnsfrom the right-hand column to the left-hand column.

c) Save your layout.

d) Specify the ID LA## and the description Layout## and select theUser-specific and Default setting checkboxes.

e) Choose Enter.

5. Check if the layout has changed, and that you can see the columns for thearticle hierarchy ID and the article hierarchy node.

a) The AH-ID and AH-nodes columns now appear on the screen and thefixed values that were maintained are displayed.

6. Change the sales price of an item and save the entries. Exit from the catalog.

a) Navigate to the Sales Price field in the Work Item line of an item andchange the price to any value.

b) Select this row and choose Save.

c) Choose Back (F3) to exit from the catalog.

7. Call the catalog again and check whether the change was saved.

a) Choose Execute to open the catalog. You see that the changed salesprice was saved and is displayed here. It is also highlighted in blue,because the original has been changed.

Continued on next page

252 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 261: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: PRICAT

8. Now post a single article. Check the status and the traffic light.

a) Select an item that is a single article (article category 00), and chooseCreate/Change. The padlock symbol appears once the item is postedin the background.

b) Choose Refresh. The padlock symbol disappears, a third row is addedwith the article master data, and the status of the item changes to 04- Forwarded.

The traffic light is green.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 253

Page 262: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT

function� Edit a PRICAT catalog item� Post a PRICAT catalog item

254 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 263: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article List

Lesson: Article List

Lesson OverviewAn article list is a predefined selection of article numbers. It allows you to use adefined group of article numbers across applications.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the possible uses of the article list� Describe the different kinds of article lists� Create your own article lists

Business ExampleYou want to make sure that articles from different merchandise categories, whichall belong to a program (for example, t-shirt, pants, and skirt in marine-look), aredistributed to the stores together. To do this, you create an article list, which isthen used in the allocation table, for example.

Uses of the Article ListAn article list is a predefined selection of article numbers. It allows you to use adefined group of article numbers across applications. Because work is distributedbetween different system landscapes, a number of articles may be determined ina system and then should be available for further processing in another system.Integrating article lists is particularly useful when using SAP ECC with SAP BI.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 255

Page 264: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 108: Using the Article List

Figure 109: Definition of the Article List

256 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 265: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article List

Figure 110: Article List Types

There are two article list types in SAP Retail:

� Dynamic Article Lists:

Dynamic article lists are composed of saved selection criteria which can beused to determine the currently valid range of article numbers.

� Static Article Lists:

Static article lists contain both the selection criteria and the article numbersthat matched the selection criteria when the article list was released in thesystem. For example, if a static article list is generated in SAP BI, only thearticle numbers are saved in SAP Retail without the selection criterion.

Only static article lists without selection criteria are available for data exchangebetween SAP BI and SAP Retail.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 257

Page 266: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Creating Article Lists

Figure 111: Article List: Tree Structure

The maintenance screen of the article list is divided into three areas. The articlelist hierarchy is maintained in the area on the left-hand side. Here, the articlelists can be grouped together on a business or application-specific basis. Thehierarchies are created under an end node in the right-hand area of the screen. Inthe hierarchy tree, end nodes with assigned article lists are flagged by a foldersymbol, while the other hierarchy nodes are not end nodes or they are end nodeswithout article list assignments.

258 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 267: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article List

The header data of the article list is created in the first step:

� Name and short text� Access status (control: who can maintain/use the article list?)� Maintenance group - to define the article fields that should be displayed

beside the article number and the article short text in the selection result list(for example, merchandise category, article category, article type).

� Maximum number of articles to be selected� Article List Type:

Static: Selection criteria are executed once and the resulting range of articlesis saved statically. When the article list is used operatively, only the savedarticle numbers are read from the database, a new selection is not made.

Dynamic: Only the selection criteria are saved. When the article list isused operatively, the selection criteria are evaluated dynamically, and thedetermined article numbers are returned as result.

� Validity of the Article List

After you create the header data, choose Edit selection to define the selectioncriteria that are to be used to determine the resulting range of articles. After theselection criteria have been determined, you can choose the Results List button todetermine and display the result.

In the case of a static article list, you can change the new article list by choosingthe change button in the toolbar in the right-hand screen area of the mainmaintenance screen. For example, articles, which do not correspond to theselection criteria created previously, can be manually added to the resulting rangeof articles, or existing articles can be removed. The manually maintained articlenumbers are saved on the database as an enhancement of the static result list. Thedeleted article numbers are removed from the database.

In the processing screen for the article list header data, you can change theselection conditions by choosing Process Selection Criteria. However, this doesnot automatically adjust the existing resulting range of articles, because this issaved statically. If you choose Edit Results List, the results list appears.

To make a new selection in the case of static article lists, you must choose UpdateResult. All relevant articles are then listed in the updated result list.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 259

Page 268: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

These are articles that:

� Would still be included in the selection subset, even though the selectionconditions have been changed (symbol [=])

� Would not be included in the selection subset anymore, because the selectioncriteria have been changed (symbol (-))

� Due to changed selection conditions or due to a previous manual deletion,would have been added or added again (symbol (+))

� Were added manually and, in accordance with the changed selectionconditions, are either included or omitted (�Manual� indicator)

In the right-hand area of the main maintenance screen, you can also execute theUpdate Result function if - for example - you have not changed the selectioncriteria, but, because new articles have been created, you can assume that theselection result may have to be expanded or reduced accordingly.

You can also call the Display Material Status function for static article lists. Here,a check is carried out for the articles that are statically saved in the article list, tosee whether these articles still exist on the database, or whether the article mayhave been flagged for deletion.

Existing article lists (static and dynamic) can be used within the article searchhelp in basically each transaction in which you can enter an article number. If amultiple selection can be made in the application, more than one article number ofthe article list can be returned to the application. In the case of applications thatcan only accept one article number, one article number must be selected fromthe article list.

Article lists have a validity period and can be automatically deleted once thevalidity period has expired. The Valid To date of an article list can be changedonline. In addition to deleting the article list, the validity also controls the displayin the F4 Help. The article list can only be selected if the current system date isin the validity interval.

The use of article lists is controlled with a status, which is specified as Planned,Released and Released + Not Modifiable. Only the user who created the articlelist can use article lists that have the status Planned. Released article lists can beused by all users, and the status Released + Not Modifiable guarantees that thedefinition of the article list cannot change until the validity period has expired(only the validity date itself can still be changed).

The article lists created in SAP Retail are available for a simplified selection ofarticles (extraction) for reporting in SAP BW. The extraction is only possiblefor static article lists.

260 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 269: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article List

You can also generate article lists from reporting results in SAP BW and thentransfer them to SAP Retail (data retraction). You can do this both whenexecuting a query online and in background processing (offline). The article listsupports you in SAP BW when you select article numbers for article-specificevaluations.

In SAP BW, in the Business Content, there are objects for mapping article lists.From SAP Retail, these objects are filled with the static article lists created there.Extraction is carried out via three different extractors. The attribute and hierarchyextractors determine their data via separate function modules. Text is extracted viadirect access to the tables. You can use the release status as a selection parameterfor the attribute extraction.

The purpose of the data retraction from SAP BW to SAP Retail is to make aquery result, which contains a number of articles, available in SAP Retail, and tosave them as a new article list there.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 261

Page 270: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

262 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 271: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article List

Exercise 18: Article List

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Explain how an article list is created and how it can be used

Business ExampleYou want to create an article list to be used in discontinuation; this article list onlycontains articles of a vendor with which you will no longer work in future.

Task:Answer the following questions:

1. An article list is ...Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Always dynamic□ B Always static□ C Either static or dynamic□ D Neither static nor dynamic

2. A static article list consists of selection criteria with which the resultingrange of articles is determined with each call.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

3. To create an article list, select the node with the name ALGR## in therelevant transaction.

4. Under AL GR. ##, create a dynamic article list AL## and select your vendorR1TV01## as a selection criterion.

Save the article list.

5. Extend the validity of the article list by a month, and release it.

Save these changes.

6. Check whether the article list is available in the discontinuation workbench.

Hint: Do not discontinue the article!

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 263

Page 272: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Solution 18: Article ListTask:Answer the following questions:

1. An article list is ...

Answer: C

An article list is either static or dynamic.

2. A static article list consists of selection criteria with which the resultingrange of articles is determined with each call.

Answer: False

A static article list consists of the selection criteria and the articles savedfor this list.

3. To create an article list, select the node with the name ALGR## in therelevant transaction.

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Article List→ Edit

b) TransactionWRF_AL

c) Switch from display mode to change mode. In the article list tree onthe left-hand side of the screen, selectMaster Data and then select thenode with the name AL GR. ##.

4. Under AL GR. ##, create a dynamic article list AL## and select your vendorR1TV01## as a selection criterion.

Save the article list.

a) Select the node AL GR. ## in the article list hierarchy.

b) Then, in the right-hand screen area, choose Create Material List toadd a new article list. Assign the name AL## and make sure that theStatic Type flag is not set.

c) Then select your article by choosing Edit selection. Then use yourvendor R1TV01## as a criterion.

d) Choose Enter. Choose F3 to navigate back to the initial screen. Savethe article list.

5. Extend the validity of the article list by a month, and release it.

Continued on next page

264 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 273: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article List

Save these changes.

a) The validity and status can be changed in the right-hand screen inthe Material List Assignment subscreen. Change the status from 1Planned to 2 Released. The article list is now available in the F4Search Help for all users.

b) Save these entries.

6. Check whether the article list is available in the discontinuation workbench.

Hint: Do not discontinue the article!

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Retailing→Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Discontinue→ Discontinuation Workbench

b) TransactionWRF_DIS_SEL

c) Open the F4 Help on the Article List ID field and display the articlelists for your user.

d) Copy the article list by double-clicking it. Do not discontinue, sincethe articles are still required for other exercises.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 265

Page 274: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the possible uses of the article list� Describe the different kinds of article lists� Create your own article lists

266 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 275: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you learn how you can configure the article master according touser/specific requirements.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs� Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences

Business ExampleYou are going to include a new article in your assortment and maintain the datathat is required to be able to use the article in the supply chain.

The employees who work with the article master in different areas should onlybe able to process the data that is relevant to them.

Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any newarticles that are being added to their assortment. Due to a particular article's poorsales figures, you decide to remove it from your store's assortment.

Technical Structure of the Article Master

Figure 112: Structuring the Article Master

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 267

Page 276: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

In the article maintenance, you can maintain all views relevant to the articlemaintenance in the correct sequence.

The data screens that correspond to the individual views are also sub-dividedinto several subscreens.

The subscreens group together several data fields according to different datamaintenance aspects.

Figure 113: Article Master - Screen Sequence

User-specific dialogs for article master maintenance allow you to save data fromvarious views in a compressed format on as few screens as possible. They alsoallow you to integrate your own fields, create user-specific dialogs, and transferdata more quickly.

The maintenance dialog for the article master is controlled by a screen sequencethat contains a selection of data screens.

The logical screen contains the field groups required for the dialog (subscreen).

Influencing factors: Here you can determine for example which standard screensequence is called up for certain transactions or users.

268 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 277: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Configure the Article Master

Figure 114: Article Master Configuration Procedure

When creating your own data screens, you should use the available Retailsubscreens. Own subscreens are necessary if alternative field groupings or newfields are required.

To create your own subscreens, copy the standard program into your own functiongroup (see IMG instructions). Then create the desired subscreens in the newfunction group.

You can only integrate fields from your own tables and subscreen containers intothe existing program by using modifying functions.

For more specifc details on how to create a customized article master, see Notes38229 and 44410 on SAP Service Marketplace.

Figure 115: Assign Screen Sequences to the Influencing Factors

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 269

Page 278: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

You can assign a screen sequence to a combination of one or more transactions,users, article types or industries. The screen sequence then appears automaticallyif the users in question select this transaction, article type or industry.

For this, you have to create groups of transactions, users, article types orindustries, by assigning them to a transaction, user, article type or industryreference according to your requirements. The screen reference number can befreely assigned. To add new users when assigning users to a user screen reference,choose New Entries.

� Screen reference �Transaction�:

This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, during thearticle master record maintenance based on the transaction code. The valuesthat are valid for this screen reference are fixed and cannot be set by the user.

� Screen reference �User�:

This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, when articlemaster records are maintained based on the user. Users are automaticallydivided into groups when the same screen reference is assigned.

� Screen reference �Article Type�:

This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, whenarticle master records are maintained based on the article type.

� Screen reference �Industry�:

This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, whenarticle master records are maintained based on the industry. For SAP Retail,you select �*� as the industry.

270 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 279: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

References

Figure 116: Controlling the field selection

To determine whether a field is supressed or displayed in the article maintenance,or whether entering a field value is mandatory or optional (in other words, whetherit is a required entry or an optional entry field), the field must be assigned to a fieldselection group. You can assign each field to only one field selection group.

You can maintain several field references for each field selection group. For eachcombination of field reference and field selection group you determine whether thefields should be suppressed, displayed, must be maintained or can be maintained.

You can then assign these field references to the article types in the article typemaintenance. Each article type is then assigned exactly one field reference.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 271

Page 280: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 117: Controlling the Reference Handling

In the detail view of the Customizing transaction Assign Fields to Field SelectionGroups, you control the reference behavior of the individual fields.

IWhen you create an article master record with reference, the field content iscopied from the reference article as default value, but only in case the Proposefield cont. indicator is set.

By means of the field attributes, you can determine whether changes to thereference should affect master records that were created with this reference. If youhave set the Propose field cont. indicator, so that the field content is proposedfrom the reference, you can also set the Copy field content indicator. The fieldcontent is then also copied as follows every time the reference is changed:

� From the generic article to the variants� From the reference site to the dependent sites� From client level to the lower validity areas of the article

If you have set the Propose field cont. indicator, by setting the Incl.initial valuesindicator, you can determine that the field content will also be copied when thereference field contains its initial value.

To restrict the article types for which the field content is proposed, set the Restrictartl cat. field accordingly.

272 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 281: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Figure 118: General Control - Reference Sites

In the general control for Retail master data, you define parameters that areimportant for different SAP Retail subfunctions on a client-wide basis.

Reference sites provide specific logistics data when creating or changing articledata. This logistical data relates, for example, to data for requirements planning,forecasting and warehouse management. This minimizes the time and effortinvolved in entering data. Changes to the reference articles can automatically beintegrated into the relevant data records.

Here you specify a distribution center that is used as reference for copyingdistribution centers-relevant article data, and you specify a store that is used asreference for copy functions for store-relevant article data.

You can use the setting Distribution Chain Control to maintain a reference site foreach distribution chain. You can only create reference sites for store distributionchains. Furthermore, none of the stores entered here can be the same as thereference store in the general Retail Master Data control.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 273

Page 282: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

274 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 283: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Exercise 19: Configuring the ArticleMaster

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Make and define user-specific article master settings (swapping and hiding

subscreens)� Assign these article master settings to a user

Business ExampleYou want to reduce your employees� workload as far as possible and therefore,in the article master, you want only the fields that they need to process to bedisplayed in the right sequence. Also, you want to change the sequence in whichthe article master views appear.

Task 1:You want to configure a customized article master view for your employees.

1. In the article maintenance, display the basic data for article R1TA12##. Usethe technical help of the screen data to make a note of the program name andthe screen numbers of the �General Data� and �Validities� screen modules.

Program name: ______________________________________________

�General Data� Screen Number:_____________________________________

�Validities� Screen Number :__________________________________________

2. You want to configure your own article master view for your employees.Open a second session in the Customizing by choosing Logistics - General→ Material Master → Configuring the Material Master→ DefineStructure of Data Screens for Each Screen Sequence

Create your own screen sequence on the basis of the �Retail FashionTab Pages� screen sequence. Your screen sequence receives the numberZ<B>, where <B> is the letter that belongs to your group number (see theconversion table); for example, Group 06 copies screen sequence 33 to ZI,and maintains the description �Retail Standard Gr##�.

Copy the screen sequence with all dependent entries.

3. What is a screen sequence?

______________________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 275

Page 284: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

______________________________________________________

4. Compare the subscreens of data screens 08 (Logistics:DC) and 09 (Logistics:Store)

Can you assign subscreens and the screens belonging to them to severaldata screens? Justify your answer.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

5. Examine the subscreens for data screen 04 (Basic data). What subscreens arethere behind screens 2002 and 2004?

2002: ____________________________

2004: ____________________________

6. Swap the subscreens 2002 and 2004 by changing the screen numbers.

7. With which screen number can you hide a subscreen?

______________________________________________________

8. Hide the �Care Code� subscreen in the Basic Data view and have a look atthe new data screen.

Task 2:You now wish to assign the changed article master to your user in the system:

1. Enter a 2-character screen reference for your user (for example, your initials)under Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/IndustrySector on the Screen Reference level.

2. Now select dialog structure Screen sequence control and add a new entryby assigning your screen reference (see 1.) and the number of your screensequence (see the previous exercise under 2.) to transaction 03. Select �*� asthe screen reference of the article type and the industry sector.

3. You now want to change the sequence of the main screens so that theLogistics: Store and the Logistics: Distribution Center views appearimmediately after the Basic Data view.

Save the entries you have made.

4. Now check your settings in the article maintenance.

Firstly, check that the defaulted views appear in the sequence that has justbeen set. Afterwards, go to the Basic Data view for article R1TA12## andcheck that the Validities data screen now appears before the General Datascreen and that the Care Code data screen is supressed.

5. Please delete the user link to your own screen sequence.

276 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 285: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Solution 19: Configuring the ArticleMasterTask 1:You want to configure a customized article master view for your employees.

1. In the article maintenance, display the basic data for article R1TA12##. Usethe technical help of the screen data to make a note of the program name andthe screen numbers of the �General Data� and �Validities� screen modules.

Program name: ______________________________________________

�General Data� Screen Number:_____________________________________

�Validities� Screen Number :__________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Display

b) Select the Basic data view

c) Click on a field in the relevant screen module (�General Data� or�Validities�) in the Basic data view of the article, and choose F1 Help

d) Choose Technical Information

Program Name: SAPLMGD2Screen Number �General Data�: 2002Screen Number �Validities�: 2004

2. You want to configure your own article master view for your employees.Open a second session in the Customizing by choosing Logistics - General→ Material Master → Configuring the Material Master→ DefineStructure of Data Screens for Each Screen Sequence

Create your own screen sequence on the basis of the �Retail FashionTab Pages� screen sequence. Your screen sequence receives the numberZ<B>, where <B> is the letter that belongs to your group number (see theconversion table); for example, Group 06 copies screen sequence 33 to ZI,and maintains the description �Retail Standard Gr##�.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 277

Page 286: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Copy the screen sequence with all dependent entries.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuring theMaterial Master→ Define Structure of Data Screens for EachScreen Sequence

b) Select screen sequence 23 and choose Copy As...

c) Assign a number and description

Number Z<B>, where <B> is the letter that belongs toyour group number (see the conversion table); forexample, Group 06 copies the screen sequence 33to ZI.

Description Retail Standard Gr##

d) Choose Enter

e) A dialog box appears. Confirm it by choosing Enter.

3. What is a screen sequence?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) Use the F1 Help on the screen sequence number to find the informationyou need

4. Compare the subscreens of data screens 08 (Logistics:DC) and 09 (Logistics:Store)

Can you assign subscreens and the screens belonging to them to severaldata screens? Justify your answer.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) Select screen 08 or 09→ Subscreen

Data screen 08 contains the distribution center of the distribution centerand data screen 09 contains the logistics view of the store. They bothcontain some of the same subscreens. That means that the subscreensappear in several data screens, together with their program.

5. Examine the subscreens for data screen 04 (Basic data). What subscreens arethere behind screens 2002 and 2004?

2002: ____________________________

Continued on next page

278 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 287: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

2004: ____________________________

a) Select screen 04→ View subscreen.

b) Select each subscreen and choose View subscreen.

2002: General Data

2004: Validities

6. Swap the subscreens 2002 and 2004 by changing the screen numbers.

a) Overwrite screen number 2002 with 2004, and vice versa.

7. With which screen number can you hide a subscreen?

______________________________________________________

a) To hide a subscreen, you have to overwrite the screen number with0001.

8. Hide the �Care Code� subscreen in the Basic Data view and have a look atthe new data screen.

a) Overwrite screen number 3001 with screen number 0001.

b) Save

c) Select the row that was changed

d) Choose View data screen

Task 2:You now wish to assign the changed article master to your user in the system:

1. Enter a 2-character screen reference for your user (for example, your initials)under Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/IndustrySector on the Screen Reference level.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuringthe Material Master→ Assign Screen Sequences to User/ArticleType/Transaction/Industry Sector.

b) Choose dialog structure User screen reference.

c) Choose New Entries

d) Enter a 2-character screen reference for your user (for example, yourinitials).

e) Table View→ Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 279

Page 288: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

2. Now select dialog structure Screen sequence control and add a new entryby assigning your screen reference (see 1.) and the number of your screensequence (see the previous exercise under 2.) to transaction 03. Select �*� asthe screen reference of the article type and the industry sector.

a) IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master→ Configuringthe Material Master→ Assign Screen Sequences to User/ArticleType/Transaction/Industry Sector.

b) Dialog structure Screen sequence control

c) Make the relevant entries

d) Table View→ Save

3. You now want to change the sequence of the main screens so that theLogistics: Store and the Logistics: Distribution Center views appearimmediately after the Basic Data view.

Save the entries you have made.

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Material Master→ Configuring theMaterial Master→Maintain Order of Main and Additional Screens.

b) Select your screen order.

c) Choose Details

d) Enter sequence number11 for Logistics: Store and sequence 12 forLogistics: Distribution Center.

e) Choose Enter

f) Choose Sort Main Screens

g) Table View→ Save

4. Now check your settings in the article maintenance.

Firstly, check that the defaulted views appear in the sequence that has justbeen set. Afterwards, go to the Basic Data view for article R1TA12## andcheck that the Validities data screen now appears before the General Datascreen and that the Care Code data screen is supressed.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Display

5. Please delete the user link to your own screen sequence.

a) IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master→ Configuringthe Material Master→ Assign Screen Sequences to User/ArticleType/Transaction/Industry Sector.

b) Select the row that contains your user entry

c) Edit→ Delete

d) Table View→ Save

280 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 289: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs� Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 281

Page 290: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Lesson Overview

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of itslife cycle

� Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in articlediscontinuation

Business ExampleYou are going to include a new article in your assortment and maintain the datathat is required to be able to use the article in the supply chain.

The employees who work with the article master in different areas should onlybe able to process the data that is relevant to them.

Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any newarticles that are being added to your assortment. Due to a particular article's poorsales figures, you decide to remove it from your store's assortment.

Reasons for and Types of Article Discontinuation

Figure 119: Reasons for Discontinuation

282 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 291: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

In certain cases, you may decide that you no longer want to carry a particulararticle; for example, if the vendor no longer carries the article, because there areless expensive alternatives, or because the article is out-of-date.

You can remove the article by deleting the article listing conditions or bydiscontinuing the article.

� Deleting the article listing conditions

If you delete an article assignment to an assortment owner, then the listingconditions that belong to it are also deleted. The article master recordremains and there may still be stock available, but no further orders can beplaced for the article. However, you may still be able to sell it.

� Discontinue article

The consequences of discontinuing an article are greater than theconsequences of deleting listing conditions. When an article is discontinued,the article master record is deleted from the database along with all thearticle data that belongs to it, including purchasing info records and listingconditions.

Figure 120: Types of Article Discontinuation

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 283

Page 292: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

The following types of article discontinuation are available in the system:

� Article Discontinuation for the vendor:

Certain vendors can no longer supply the article for any of the company'ssites.

� Article Discontinuation for the Assortment:

The article can no longer be procured internally or externally for particularassortments (sites) and can no longer be sold.

� Article Discontinuation for the Distribution Chain:

The article can no longer be carried and sold in any assortments in a certaindistribution chain .

� Client-Wide Article Discontinuation:

If an article is to be discontinued from all assortments, it can be discontinuedon a client-wide basis. The article can no longer be used in any operativebusiness processes.

284 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 293: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Discontinuation Process

Figure 121: Stages in the Discontinuation Process

� Ordering block date:

The date from which a site can no longer order an article from a vendor. Thedelivery date of the purchase order document must be before this block date.You need to provide this date for all types of article discontinuation.

� Sales block date:

The date from which an article is no longer allowed to be sold in a site.Specify this date for the article discontinuation for the assortment and forthe distribution chain.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 285

Page 294: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Figure 122: Article Discontinuation Process

Steps in discontinuation:

� You decide to discontinue an article on a particular date (ordering block date,sales block date) and start preparing for the discontinuation process. One wayof reducing the stock you have in storage more quickly is to run a promotion.

� After this, the article discontinuation is triggered for a particular day.� If the article is, for example, still in stock, in a stock allocation, an

arrangement or a purchase order, then you cannot discontinue the article.You must change this data to eliminate the error messages.

� In certain cases, the system automatically defaults a solution, for example,transfer posting the stock to value-only articles. You can implement theseautomatic follow-up actions or you may decide to let the responsible usersprocess the problems manually.

� If there are problems that could not or cannot be solved automatically, theusers responsible receive detailed messages in their integrated inboxes.

� If all the necessary changes have been made and the sales blocking time hasarrived, then the article is first deleted logically, and then, at a previouslydefined point in time, deleted physically from the database.

286 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 295: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Figure 123: Subsequent Processing in Article Discontinuation

SAP delivers a range of standard subsequent processing procedures. Theseprocedures are used to resolve errors that occur during article discontinuation.Customers can, however, define additional procedures and link them up with theerror messages using the assignment table in the subsequent processing procedures.

At present, the following subsequent processing procedures are available:

� AK: Delete material from promotion� AM: Delete material from product catalog� EB: Reset source list entries� IF: Delete information records for supplying plants� IS: Delete information records� LK: Reset listing conditions� QB: Reset quota arrangement� VM: Transfer posting to value-only article� VK: Reset selling period

Subsequent processing procedures are assigned to the possible error messages.One subsequent processing procedure can be defined as the standard procedurefor each error message.

The processor group is an object from the HR organization model.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 287

Page 296: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

288 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 297: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Exercise 20: Article Discontinuation

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Explain the differences between the simplified and the complete checks

for article discontinuation� Flag an article for logical and physical discontinuation� Trigger an automatic follow-up procedure� Find and solve a problem resulting from the discontinuation process that

you have been allocated as processor.

Business ExampleYou have decided that the articles R1TA50## and R1TA51## should no longer becarried in the store RT##. To avoid further orders being placed for these articles inthe store, you discontinue the article in assortment RT##.

Task 1:

1. Execute the discontinuation for an assortment. Select the correct menu pathfor this.

2. You want to discontinue article R1TA50## and article R1TA51##(using themultiple selection function) for your assortment RT##.

3. For performance reasons, you first select the simplified check. If only oneproblem per article occurs during the discontinuation check, the system canexecute the relevant follow-up action immediately and set the deletion flagright away. The result should be given immediately. If you wish, you can usethe test mode before performing the actual check.

4. Which result provides the simplified check for the discontinuation of botharticles?

R1TA50##:______________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

R1TA51##:______________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

5. Why is it not possible to discontinue article R1TA50## straight away?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 289

Page 298: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

Task 2:As you cannot use the simplified check to discontinue article R1TA50##, youuse the complete check instead.

1. Discontinue article R1TA50## with the complete check. Select the correctmenu path for this.

2. Check the article R1TA50## for the assortment RT##. Deactivate the offlinechecks to receive the discontinuation log directly.

Hint: If you forget to deactivate the Offline checks, you can viewthe result by choosing Discontinue→ Worklist.

3. Perform the follow-up actions defaulted by the system and then check thearticle again (choose Edit→ Check article again). Which error messagecannot be processed automatically?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

4. Discontinue your article now.

Task 3:View the discontinuation status of articles R1TA50## and R1TA51##.

1. Which flag is set for your assortment RT##?

R1TA50##______________________________________________________

R1TA51##______________________________________________________

Task 4:You now use the work item to continue the discontinuation process.

1. Go to your inbox and process the unsolved error by deleting the order itemthere.

Hint: The work item appears in the inbox a few minutes after saving.Ensure that you only process the work item for your store RT##.

Continued on next page

290 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 299: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Task 5:Finally, check the discontinuation status of your article R1TA50## again.

1. What status has the article for your assortment RT## now?

______________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 291

Page 300: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Solution 20: Article DiscontinuationTask 1:

1. Execute the discontinuation for an assortment. Select the correct menu pathfor this.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Data→Material→ Discontinue→ Assortment

2. You want to discontinue article R1TA50## and article R1TA51##(using themultiple selection function) for your assortment RT##.

a)

Assort-ment

RT##

Article by means of multiple selection (arrow after the articlefield): R1TA50## and R1TA51##.

3. For performance reasons, you first select the simplified check. If only oneproblem per article occurs during the discontinuation check, the system canexecute the relevant follow-up action immediately and set the deletion flagright away. The result should be given immediately. If you wish, you can usethe test mode before performing the actual check.

a) Simplified check

Remove the check for test mode and do not make any changes to anyother checkboxes.

4. Which result provides the simplified check for the discontinuation of botharticles?

R1TA50##:______________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

R1TA51##:______________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

a) Results

R1TA50##: red traffic light; the deletion indicator is not set.

R1TA51##: green traffic light; the deletion indicator is set.

Continued on next page

292 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 301: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

5. Why is it not possible to discontinue article R1TA50## straight away?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

a) The article cannot be discontinued as a purchase order exists.

Task 2:As you cannot use the simplified check to discontinue article R1TA50##, youuse the complete check instead.

1. Discontinue article R1TA50## with the complete check. Select the correctmenu path for this.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Discontinue→ Assortment

2. Check the article R1TA50## for the assortment RT##. Deactivate the offlinechecks to receive the discontinuation log directly.

Hint: If you forget to deactivate the Offline checks, you can viewthe result by choosing Discontinue→ Worklist.

a)

Assortment RT##Article R1TA50##

b) Complete check

c) Deselect the Offline checks checkbox.

Hint: If you forget to deactivate the Offline checks, you cansee the result by choosing Discontinue→Worklist.

3. Perform the follow-up actions defaulted by the system and then check thearticle again (choose Edit→ Check article again). Which error messagecannot be processed automatically?

___________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 293

Page 302: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

___________________________________________________________

a) Select the item

b) Choose Follow-Up Actions

c) Choose Enter to confirm the message.

d) Edit→ Check article again

The message �Purchase order exists� could not be deleted automatically.

4. Discontinue your article now.

a) Choose Discontinue

Task 3:View the discontinuation status of articles R1TA50## and R1TA51##.

1. Which flag is set for your assortment RT##?

R1TA50##______________________________________________________

R1TA51##______________________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Discontinue→Discontinuation Status

b) Use multiple selection (arrow after the article field) to select articleR1TA50## and article R1TA51##.

c) Select assortment RT##.

R1TA50##: Discontinuation Process Started

R1TA51##: Deletion flag set

Continued on next page

294 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 303: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Task 4:You now use the work item to continue the discontinuation process.

1. Go to your inbox and process the unsolved error by deleting the order itemthere.

Hint: The work item appears in the inbox a few minutes after saving.Ensure that you only process the work item for your store RT##.

a) SAP menu→ Office→ Work Center

Hint: The work item appears in the inbox a few minutes aftersaving. Ensure that you only process the work item for yourstore RT##.

b) In the Business Workplace choose Inbox→ Workflow→ Groupedaccording to task→ Display Error in Discontinuation of Site Article

c) Select work item

d) Choose Execute

e) Select and delete the purchase order.

f) Message �... Execute function ...� appears. Choose �Yes to confirm it�.

g) Purchase Order→ Save

h) Choose Update

i) Choose F3 to go back and terminate the work item.

Task 5:Finally, check the discontinuation status of your article R1TA50## again.

1. What status has the article for your assortment RT## now?

______________________________________________________

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Discontinue→Discontinuation Status

Article R1TA50##Assortment RT##New Status Deletion flag set

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 295

Page 304: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 6: Single Articles IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its

life cycle� Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article

discontinuation

296 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 305: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Create an article master record� Name the various article categories� Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the

organizational units� Maintain the individual views in the article master� List the integrated mass maintenance options� Describe what the article core master data is� Explain how you can use the maintenance groups� Explain the use of the article monitor� Describe the different ways of copying the article� Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT

function� Edit a PRICAT catalog item� Post a PRICAT catalog item� Name the possible uses of the article list� Describe the different kinds of article lists� Create your own article lists� Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs� Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences� Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its

life cycle� Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article

discontinuation

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 297

Page 306: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

298 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 307: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7Generic Articles and Variants

Unit OverviewThis unit explains how you can create variants via characteristics on themerchandise category and via the characteristics profiles. You will learn how tocreate a generic article with variants, how to control the sales price maintenancefor the variants, and how to maintain additionals for an article.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Create characteristics� Assign characteristic values to characteristics� Group characteristic values together� Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category� Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles� List the prerequisites for creating a generic article� Create a generic article with variants� Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article� Name the possible uses of the prepack� Describe the structure of a prepack� Create a prepack article for an existing generic article� Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most

important parameters� Assign additionals to an article

Unit ContentsLesson: Characteristics ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

Exercise 21: Characteristics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309Lesson: Creating a Generic Article .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314

Exercise 22: Creating a Generic Article .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319Exercise 23: Pricing for Generic Articles and Variants .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Lesson: Prepack ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 299

Page 308: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Exercise 24: Structured Articles .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337Lesson: Additionals.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Exercise 25: Additionals .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

300 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 309: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

Lesson: Characteristics

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the role of characteristics, and tells you how they are createdand what attributes they can have.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Create characteristics� Assign characteristic values to characteristics� Group characteristic values together� Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category

Business ExampleYou add the area Sport to your textiles assortment.

You carry the sports textiles in different colors and sizes. You should be ableto assign the different colors and sizes to the different articles as simply andefficiently as possible.

Creating CharacteristicsCharacteristics refer to attributes of an object, such as the color of a blouse, thesize of a T-shirt or the flavor of a yoghurt.

You create characteristics for merchandise catagories or merchandise catagoryhierarchy levels. Within a grouping, the values of the characteristics are passed onfrom one level to the next. You can copy, restrict or add the values of the superiorhierarchy level in the subordinate level, depending on how the characteristic isdefined.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 301

Page 310: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Figure 124: Characteristic: Definition

We differentiate between:

� Variant-creating characteristics (suitable for creating generic articles)� Non-variant-creating characteristics (for display purposes only)

Characteristic ValuesCharacteristic values are the concrete attributes of a characteristic, for example,characteristic = color, characteristic values = red, blue, yellow.

Characteristics can be valued differently for each individual article, for example,an article with the characteristic Color can receive the value Red, while anotherarticle can receive the value Blue.

Characteristic values can be created with two different transactions.

302 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 311: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

Figure 125: Characteristic Values: Options during the Creation

Use the characteristic maintenance (transaction CT04) to create a characteristic.If you want to use the new characteristic value storage, you have to assign afunction module in the characteristics maintenance, which is used to carryout the value check. The name of the function module delivered by SAP isWRF_CHECK_CHAR_VAL.

After you save the new characteristic, you can navigate to the new maintenancetransaction (WRFCHVAL), to create the characteristic values for thischaracteristic. You can only navigate to the new transaction in for characteristicsthat use the function module named above as value check. The new characteristicvalue maintenance is also only possible for character format (CHAR)characteristics, and when the maximum number of characters is 18.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 303

Page 312: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Figure 126: How to proceed when using the new characteristic value storage

In addition to the actual characteristic values, up to ten customer-specific valuescan be maintained via the maintenance dialog (for example, for colors, aninternal color code can be converted into a pantone color code, and so on). Thecharacteristic values maintained in this way, and the characteristic values createddirectly for the characteristic by means of transaction CT04, are stored in differenttables.

The use of color and size characteristics in operative processes (for example, inthe markdown planning, in the operative planning, in BW) is supported.

� Characteristic typing� direct/high-performance access to color and size information by means of

the article basic data (table MARA)� Color and size information updated to the BW

Characteristic typing is used to assign the information to a characteristic (whichcan have any value and description), information about whether a color, a mainsize or an additional size is concerned. This information is required as a control inoperative processes (for example, price planning workbench). The characteristicsvalues of a typed characteristic are also stored redundantly in table MARA foreach variant of a generic article, so that the operative processes can perform betterwhen accessing variants of a special color or size. The characteristic is typed as acolor characteristic, size characteristic (main size) or size characteristic (secondsize) in the new characteristic value maintenance. You also have the option ofselecting Not typed for characteristics that do not fit into a color or size schema,but for which you still want to use the new value storage.

304 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 313: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

Furthermore you define the check option, which has an effect during the articlemaintenance, is also defined. You can use this to control whether additionalcharacteristic values, which were not defined in the new characteristic valuestorage and therefore are only valid for this article, can be created spontaneouslyduring the article maintenance. In addition to the characteristic value that is amaximum of 18 characters long, language-dependent descriptions can also becreated (a maximum of 10).

Figure 127: Characteristic Value Maintenance

If additional columns were defined in Customizing for the characteristic typein question (for example, analyzing color, pantone color), values can also becreated for the characteristic type. The values in the additional columns can beinterpreted as an alternative identification of the characteristic values. There canbe an improved selection of the relevant internal characteristic values within theframework of the search help.

In the case of color and size characteristics, as a rule, a large number ofcharacteristic values is concerned (for example, several thousand color values,which are subject to constant seasonal enhancements), where, in the case ofindividual generic articles, only a very limited section from the characteristicvalue spectrum is required (for example, 20 colors and 20 sizes). This spectrum ofrelevant characteristic values can vary from one generic article to the next.

Against this background, it is important that the available characteristic values canbe logically bundled into groupings defined by the customer. This means that youcan quickly compile the characteristics relevant to you, by navigating through theindividual groupings.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 305

Page 314: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Figure 128: Characteristic Value Groups

After the characteristic values are saved, you can group the existing characteristicvalues application-specifically in form of a hierarchy. The first time themaintenance of the characteristic value groupings is called, only the root node ofthe hierarchy that represents the characteristic exists.

The left-hand screen area displays the hierarchy tree that lists the createdcharacteristic value groups. Characteristic values can be assigned to the individualhierarchy nodes at every level (screen area on the bottom right: characteristicvalues assignment), so that the characteristic values can be bundled and distributedcorrectly for the user. Characteristic value can be assigned to any number ofhierarchy nodes. The possible use of a hierarchy node can also be restricted to afixed number of merchandise categories (upper right screen area: merchandisecategory restriction). This means that, in the article maintenance, this node is notdisplayed in the characteristic values search help, if the existing article does notbelong to one of the specified merchandise categories within the restriction list. Ifthere are no restrictions, the node is available to all merchandise categories.

The hierarchical characteristic value grouping defined in this way is thenavailable during the article maintenance when the search help is used to select thecharacteristic values. For improved orientation, the individually defined additionalcolumns (for example, analyzing color, pantone color) are also available in thismaintenance and in the characteristic values search help.

You can also use transaction WRFCHVALTYPE to type characteristics.Generally, this only concerns characteristics that do not use the new value storagecharacteristic values. The other characteristics are typed directly in the newmaintenance of the characteristic values.

306 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 315: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

The check option cannot be maintained in such characteristics. Here, in thecharacteristic maintenance (CT04) in the Values tab, the Additional Valuesindicator must be set if you want to be able to create characteristic values in thearticle maintenance on an ad-hoc basis.

If a categorization is carried out subsequently and variants already exist, whichuse this characteristic, there is a report you can use to redundantly store the colorand size information in table MARA.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 307

Page 316: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

308 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 317: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

Exercise 21: Characteristics

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a characteristic for which the new characteristic value storage can be

used. Values are maintained for this characteristic, and are then groupedtogether into characteristic value groups.

Business ExampleIn companies that work with a lot of generic articles and a large number of variantsfor each generic article, it is important that the maintenance of the characteristicvalues and the selection of these values for the article creation is as user-friendlyas possible.

Task 1:

1. To be able to use the characteristic value creation for a characteristic, thecharacteristic must be created in the format _____________.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

Result

Task 2:

1. If you group characteristic values together ...Choose the correct answer(s).□ A ... a characteristic value can be assigned to a characteristic value

group□ B ... a characteristic value can be assigned to several characteristic

value groups□ C ... a characteristic value must be assigned to more than one

characteristic value group□ D ... a characteristic value can be assigned to no characteristic

value group

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 309

Page 318: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Task 3:You want to add textiles to your assortment, and so created a new merchandisecategory hierarchy level �Apparel�, and created the merchandise category�Sportswear� under this hierarchy level. In the merchandise category�Sportswear�, generic articles are created with the characteristics Color and Size.You want to use the new characteristic values maintenance for these characteristics.

1. Create a new characteristic Color##.

2. Use the maintenance transaction to maintain the characteristic values, andalso enter a customer-specific value in the Analyzing Color column.

Maintain the following as characteristic values:

Char. Value Description Analyzing Color1 white white11 snow white white12 wool white13 beige white2 yellow yellow21 sunflower yellow22 orange orange23 apricot orange24 peach orange3 red red31 coral red32 bordeaux red8 black black

3. The various color characteristic values are likely not to be relevant for allarticles, but can be restricted to certain values depending on the season.Maintain two characteristic values groups and divide the values among bothseasons. The basic colors black and white are included in both groups.

4. Create a characteristic profile MP## with the new characteristic Color##and the existing characteristic Size.

5. Assign the characteristics profile to RF1T0## Sweat-Shirts GR##.

310 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 319: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

Solution 21: CharacteristicsTask 1:

1. To be able to use the characteristic value creation for a characteristic, thecharacteristic must be created in the format _____________.

Answer:

Result

Task 2:

1. If you group characteristic values together ...

Answer: A, B, D

Task 3:You want to add textiles to your assortment, and so created a new merchandisecategory hierarchy level �Apparel�, and created the merchandise category�Sportswear� under this hierarchy level. In the merchandise category�Sportswear�, generic articles are created with the characteristics Color and Size.You want to use the new characteristic values maintenance for these characteristics.

1. Create a new characteristic Color##.

a) Use the transaction CT04 to create the characteristic and onthe Values tab maintain the check via the function moduleWRF_CHECK_CHAR_VAL.

2. Use the maintenance transaction to maintain the characteristic values, andalso enter a customer-specific value in the Analyzing Color column.

Maintain the following as characteristic values:

Char. Value Description Analyzing Color1 white white11 snow white white12 wool white13 beige white

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 311

Page 320: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

2 yellow yellow21 sunflower yellow22 orange orange23 apricot orange24 peach orange3 red red31 coral red32 bordeaux red8 black black

a) Use transactionWRFCHVAL to create characteristic values.

3. The various color characteristic values are likely not to be relevant for allarticles, but can be restricted to certain values depending on the season.Maintain two characteristic values groups and divide the values among bothseasons. The basic colors black and white are included in both groups.

a) Use transactionWRFCHVALGRP to group together the characteristicvalues. Under your characteristic Color##, maintain the groupsSpring/Summer and Autumn/Winter.

4. Create a characteristic profile MP## with the new characteristic Color##and the existing characteristic Size.

a) In transaction CLWE, create a characteristics profile, maintaina description and use the Characteristics tab to assign the twocharacteristics. The Relevancy Indicator is 2.

5. Assign the characteristics profile to RF1T0## Sweat-Shirts GR##.

a) Assign the profile to the merchandise category in transactionWG22.Maintain the profile and then choose Create.

312 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 321: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Characteristics

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create characteristics� Assign characteristic values to characteristics� Group characteristic values together� Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 313

Page 322: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Lesson OverviewThis lesson shows you how to create generic articles and variants.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles� List the prerequisites for creating a generic article� Create a generic article with variants� Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article

Business ExampleYour vendor is offering a new T-shirt for the new season in various colors andsizes.

The Structure of a Generic Article with VariantsVariants are articles that only differ from one another in certain characteristicsvalues (for example, color, size or flavor). They are compiled under one genericarticle. Using generic articles makes it easier to maintain variants, as the data thatis valid for all variants only needs to be entered once for the generic article.

Figure 129: Generic Articles/Variants: Definition

314 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 323: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Generic articles can be used in all areas of retail in which articles only differ incertain characteristics values.

Figure 130: Generic Articles: Examples

Creating Variants for a Generic Article

Figure 131: Generic Articles: Creating Variants

Generic articles are created with the article category 01 Generic article.

To be able to create a generic article in a merchandise category, there must beat least one variant-creating characteristic in the merchandise category. Inorder to flag a characteristic as Relevant to variants you use the Relevancy

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 315

Page 324: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Indicator when assigning the characteristic to the merchandise category or to thecharacteristics profile. The relevancy indicator must be set to 2, to be able to usethis characteristic to create variants of a generic article.

Several characteristic profiles can be assigned to one merchandise category. Whenyou create an article in the merchandise category in question, you can select one ofthe assigned characteristic profiles. The characteristics of the characteristic profiledetermines the possible variants (matrix/list) for the generic article. Otherwisethe variants are created when you use the merchandise category characteristics tocreate a generic article.

A generic article matrix is formed from the variant-creating characteristics. Youcan select the variants that are to be created by simply selecting the relevantcheckboxes. If you have three characteristics, one is fixed and the two unfixedcharacteristics form the matrix. If you have more than three characteristics, thepossible variants are displayed in a list.

Figure 132: Generic Articles: Number Assignment for Variants

In SAP Retail, the generic article variants are usually numbered based on thegeneric article's number with internal number assignment in form of a sequentialthree-digit suffix.

You can use a user exit to compose the article numbers of the variants, forexample, from:

� The generic article number� The first 2 digits of the characteristic Color.� The size

316 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 325: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Figure 133: Generic Articles: Variant Listing

With variant listing, the system checks if exactly the same variant does not alreadyexist as part of a generic article in the module.

Generic Article Pricing

Figure 134: Generic Articles: Pricing Control (1)

Influencing Factors in the Pricing ControlGeneric article variants can either automatically inherit a sales price from thegeneric article or have their own separate sales price.

The sales price calculation for variants is controlled by means of a pricing profileand a pricing reference article.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 317

Page 326: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

The pricing profile in the article master record (Basic Data) of the generic articlecan have the following attributes:

� 0 = Variants priceable differently; do not propose GArticle as ref.� 1 = Variants priceable differently; propose GArticle as ref.� 2 = All variants have the sales price of the generic article

The pricing profiles are preset and cannot be changed.

The pricing reference article field contains the article number of the article fromwhich the variants receive their price.

� If the pricing reference article field contains the generic article number, thenthe variant has the price that was inherited from the generic article.

� If the pricing reference article field is empty or contains the variant's ownarticle number, then a separate price has to be calculated for the variant.

� If the field contains the article number of another variant, then the varianthas the price of the variant that was entered.

In the Sales view, choose Variant Prices to maintain the pricing reference articlefor each variant.

Figure 135: Generic Articles: Calculation Controls (2)

For each variant, the field for the pricing reference article contains either thegeneric article number (then the variant inherits the generic article price), or thevariant's own article number (then a separate price is calculated for the variant), orthe article number of another variant, if the variant is to have the same price.

If the field for the pricing reference article remains empty, then the result is thesame as entering the variant's own article number.

318 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 327: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Exercise 22: Creating a Generic Article

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a generic article with variants

Business ExampleYour current summer collection contains a new dress in different colors, for whichyou now want to create the master record in the system.

Task 1:Now create the dress as a generic article in the system.

1. Create the summer dress as a generic article with the views Basic Data,Listing, Purchasing and Sales. The article number A2## should be assignedto the article. It belongs to the article type Fashion and to the merchandisecategory RF12124. The article is delivered in the purchasing organizationR300 by the vendor RF1304. You now want to create the article for thedistribution channel RG10/R1.

2. Use the characteristic profile RFP02 to create the generic article variants.

3. The dress is offered is the colors beige and blue and in the sizes 10-16.Select the relevant colors under Basics and assign the sizes to the article.

4. The dress is offered in the following color-size combinations:

10 12 14 16beige X X Xblue X X X

5. Go to the basic data view of the article. The article receives the descriptionSummer dress Gr. ##.

6. All generic article variants have the unit of measure each. Let the systemdetermine the instore EANs for the variants.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 319

Page 328: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Task 2:You now determine in which assortments your dress should be included. You usethe listing procedure, which checks merchandise categories and assortment grades,to list in stores and distribution centers.

1. Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants. Thearticle is carried in the stores from the 1st of the following month until theend of the current year.

2. Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments.

Task 3:Maintain the purchasing data for your vendor RF1304 in the Purchasing tab.

1. The purchasing group 001 is responsible for the vendor.

2. The planned delivery time is 20 days.

3. You have agreed on a purchasing price of 43 USD for each dress. However,all the variants of size 10 are going to be delivered at a price of 40 USDfor each piece.

Task 4:In the Sales tab, maintain sales data for the distribution chain RG10/R1.

1. The variants of the color beige are not to be sold until one month from today.Maintain the corresponding point in time for these variants (For sale from).

2. You sell the dress in distribution chain R10/R1 for a price of 199 USD each.

3. Save the article data.

Task 5:Your vendor offers you men's trousers, which have color, size and waist sizevariants. Create this article in the merchandise category Bus. Cas. Trousers(RF13121).

1. Create the Basic Data for a generic article A3## in the merchandise categoryRF13121 with the article type Fashion.

2. The characteristics can be determined from the characteristics profileMENSPANTS. There are the following pants combinations:

Für waist 32:

Continued on next page

320 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 329: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Khaki NavyLength 33 X X

Length 34 X X

For waist 34:

Khaki NavyLength 33 X XLength 34 X X

3. Display all the variants in the list display.

4. Do not save the article data.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 321

Page 330: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Solution 22: Creating a Generic ArticleTask 1:Now create the dress as a generic article in the system.

1. Create the summer dress as a generic article with the views Basic Data,Listing, Purchasing and Sales. The article number A2## should be assignedto the article. It belongs to the article type Fashion and to the merchandisecategory RF12124. The article is delivered in the purchasing organizationR300 by the vendor RF1304. You now want to create the article for thedistribution channel RG10/R1.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Create

b) Select the Basic Data, Listing, Purchasing and Sales views.

c)

Article Number A2##

Merchandise Category RF12124

Article Type Fashion

Article Category Generic article

Purchasing Organization R300

Vendor RF1304

Sales Organization RG10

Distribution Channel R1

d) Enter

2. Use the characteristic profile RFP02 to create the generic article variants.

a) Double-click the characteristic profile RFP02.

3. The dress is offered is the colors beige and blue and in the sizes 10-16.Select the relevant colors under Basics and assign the sizes to the article.

a) Choose the F4 Help beside the Colors field.

b) In the hierarchy, expand the Basics area.

c) Press CTRL, select beige and blue and choose Enter.

d) Choose the F4 Help beside the Sizes field. Select the sizes 10,12,14and 16, and choose Enter:

4. The dress is offered in the following color-size combinations:

Continued on next page

322 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 331: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

10 12 14 16beige X X Xblue X X X

a) To go to the generic article matrix, choose F3.

b) Select the combinations specified in the table.

5. Go to the basic data view of the article. The article receives the descriptionSummer dress Gr. ##.

a) You can go back to the basic data view of the article by choosing F3.

Article Short Text Summer dress Gr##

6. All generic article variants have the unit of measure each. Let the systemdetermine the instore EANs for the variants.

a) In the subscreen Default value creation of variant EANs:

AUoM EA

EAN Category IE

Select Internal EAN Assignment.

b) Variant-EANs button XXX

c) Confirm the warning message by choosing Enter.

d) You can go back to the basic data view of the article by choosing F8.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 323

Page 332: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Task 2:You now determine in which assortments your dress should be included. You usethe listing procedure, which checks merchandise categories and assortment grades,to list in stores and distribution centers.

1. Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants. Thearticle is carried in the stores from the 1st of the following month until theend of the current year.

a) Go to the Listing tab

Listing Procedures B1

Listing from <1st of the followingmonth>

Listing to <31st of December ofthis year>

2. Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments.

a) Choose Execute Listing

b) Choose Assorts

Task 3:Maintain the purchasing data for your vendor RF1304 in the Purchasing tab.

1. The purchasing group 001 is responsible for the vendor.

a) Go to the Purchasing tab.

PurchasingGroup 001

2. The planned delivery time is 20 days.

a) Go to the Purchasing tab

Pl. Deliv. Time 20

Continued on next page

324 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 333: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

3. You have agreed on a purchasing price of 43 USD for each dress. However,all the variants of size 10 are going to be delivered at a price of 40 USDfor each piece.

a) Go to the Purchasing tab

Net Price: 43

b) Choose Variant Prices button

c) For variant blue/size 10, enter 40 as the price.

d) Copy rule Copy Changes to the following node of the column

e) Choose Apply Rule

f) Go back using the green arrow.

Task 4:In the Sales tab, maintain sales data for the distribution chain RG10/R1.

1. The variants of the color beige are not to be sold until one month from today.Maintain the corresponding point in time for these variants (For sale from).

a) Double-click the For sale from field

b) For the variants of the color beige, maintain a selling time one monthfrom today.

c) Use the green arrow to go back.

2. You sell the dress in distribution chain R10/R1 for a price of 199 USD each.

a)

Final price 199

Enter

3. Save the article data.

a) Article→ Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 325

Page 334: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Task 5:Your vendor offers you men's trousers, which have color, size and waist sizevariants. Create this article in the merchandise category Bus. Cas. Trousers(RF13121).

1. Create the Basic Data for a generic article A3## in the merchandise categoryRF13121 with the article type Fashion.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Create

Article Number A3##

Article Type Fashion Goods

Merchandise Category RF13121

Article Category 01

Enter

2. The characteristics can be determined from the characteristics profileMENSPANTS. There are the following pants combinations:

Für waist 32:

Khaki NavyLength 33 X X

Length 34 X X

For waist 34:

Continued on next page

326 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 335: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Khaki NavyLength 33 X XLength 34 X X

a) Double-click theMENSPANTS characteristic profile.

b) Choose the following characteristic values:

Waist 32 and 34Length 33 and 34Color Khaki and Navy

c) Choose the green arrow

d) Fix the color and size characteristics by setting the radiobutton forLength to Y and the radiobutton for Color to X.

e) Select the relevant combinations for waist 32.

f) Double-click the characteristicWaist to select the value 34. Also createall combinations for waist 34.

3. Display all the variants in the list display.

a) Choose Layout Mode...

4. Do not save the article data.

a) Do not save the article data.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 327

Page 336: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

328 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 337: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Exercise 23: Pricing for Generic Articlesand Variants

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Determine how you should calculate the prices of generic article variants� Calculate the prices of a generic article variant differently

Business ExampleSize 10 clothes are going to be sold at a lower price than the other sizes

Task:The generic article has been created for the dress and you now want to sell allvariants of the size 10 dress for a lower price.

1. To calculate separate prices for the variants, you have to select a specificpricing profile in the generic article�s Basic Data.

2. The settings in that pricing profile ensure that the generic article is defaultedas the pricing reference article. Which pricing profile do you select?

______________________________________________________

3. What other options are available for pricing?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

4. In the distribution chain RG10/R1, you want to sell the dress in the variantbeige, size 10 for USD 189. Call the Sales view to maintain the sales price.

How can you maintain a separate sales price for this variant?

______________________________________________________

5. The other variants of size 10 should have the same price as the variant beige,size 10. What is the easiest way of doing this?

6. Set the indicator to save the sales conditions and save the article data.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 329

Page 338: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Solution 23: Pricing for Generic Articlesand VariantsTask:The generic article has been created for the dress and you now want to sell allvariants of the size 10 dress for a lower price.

1. To calculate separate prices for the variants, you have to select a specificpricing profile in the generic article�s Basic Data.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Data→Material→ Change

Article A2##Sales Organization RG10Distribution Channel R1

Select the Basic Data and Sales views.

2. The settings in that pricing profile ensure that the generic article is defaultedas the pricing reference article. Which pricing profile do you select?

______________________________________________________

a) Go to the �Groupings� subscreen

Pricing profile 1

3. What other options are available for pricing?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) F4 Help

4. In the distribution chain RG10/R1, you want to sell the dress in the variantbeige, size 10 for USD 189. Call the Sales view to maintain the sales price.

How can you maintain a separate sales price for this variant?

Continued on next page

330 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 339: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

______________________________________________________

a) Sales tab

b) Choose Variant Prices

c) Choose Maintain Pricing Reference Article and remove the genericarticle as a price article for variant beige, size 10.

d) Choose Copy

e) For variant beige, size 10, enter 189 as the final price.

5. The other variants of size 10 should have the same price as the variant beige,size 10. What is the easiest way of doing this?

a) Choose Maintain Pricing Reference Article

b) For the variants of size 10, enter the article number of the variant beige,size 10 as a Pricing Reference Article.

c) Choose the green arrow to return to the main data screen.

6. Set the indicator to save the sales conditions and save the article data.

a) Set the Save Calculated Price indicator.

b) Material→ Save

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 331

Page 340: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles� List the prerequisites for creating a generic article� Create a generic article with variants� Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article

332 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 341: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Prepack

Lesson: Prepack

Lesson OverviewA prepack is a structured article. Prepacks are mainly used in the textiles sector.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the possible uses of the prepack� Describe the structure of a prepack� Create a prepack article for an existing generic article

Business ExampleYour stores always receive quantities of T-shirts and shoes in fixed ratios of colorsand sizes

You use prepacks to define this quantity distribution.

Using PrepacksA prepack is a quantity of variants of one or more generic articles. A prepackis purchased as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number, apurchase price and purchase price conditions. The components of a prepack mustbelong to the same merchandise category as the prepack itself. A prepack can beprepared by the retailer, the manufacturer or the vendor. Prepacks are mostlyused in the textile sector or shoe area.

Figure 136: Prepack Structure

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 333

Page 342: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

In the retail sector, prepacks are only sold in their individual components, whereasin wholesale, they are sold as complete prepacks.

Prepacks allow you to order a predefined quantity of variants of a generic article.In the purchase order, you no longer have to fill the quantity fields of the variants,since these values are proposed from the prepack maintenance.

Note: Example for a prepack:You created sneakers as a generic article. Thesneakers are available in sizes 11, 11.5 and 12. The sneakers are alwaysordered with the following quantity ratios.

Size 11 = 3x

Size 11.5 = 5x

Size12 = 3x

You define a prepack, which represents the above quantity ratios.

In the purchase order, you enter the article number of the prepack. If younow select the value 3 for the prepack, the sneakers are automaticallyordered in the following quantities:

Size 11 = 9x

Size 11.5 = 15x

Size 12 = 9x

Inventory is usually managed in the store on individual component level, and inthe distribution center, it is managed on complete prepack level. The splittingtype can be set in Customizing and the system then automatically carries out theinventory posting at the defined level (i.e. at component- or header level).

Prepacks are integrated into the process of the stock allocation with thecorresponding data for the generic article in question, the characteristics and theassortment planning. This means that an intelligent prepack stock allocation ispossible, which helps to improve the stock turnover and to reduce markdowns.You can find more information about this on the SAP Help Portal at: help.sap.com

Maintaining PrepacksPrepacks are created with the article category Prepack. Bills of material areused to assign generic articles with their variants. You call the bills of materialmaintenance by selecting the Components button in the Basic Data view. Thenenter a generic article. Choose Continue. The system automatically sets thevariants of this generic article. You now only have to enter the required quantities.

334 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 343: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Prepack

Figure 137: Creating Prepacks

Hint: If you have created quota scales for the variant-creatingcharacteristics of the generic article, the system can automaticallydetermine the required quantities from the quota scales. To do this,expand the relevant generic article and the relevant characteristic in thetree structure, and select the required quota scale.

Figure 138: Use the Prepack Allocation Planning to Create a Prepack

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 335

Page 344: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

The prepack allocation planning allows you to link several prepack articles witha generic article, and to define how these prepack articles are composed. Youcan determine the components of a prepack article using a matrix. You canprocess generic articles with up to two characteristics. The first characteristic (forexample, the color) is displayed in the rows of the matrix, and the second (forexample, the size) in the columns. Both characteristics are determined by the orderin which they were defined in Customizing.

You can determine the stores that are going to sell the articles concerned usingassortments or allocation rules to which you assign the corresponding prepacks.You can also determine delivery phases specifically for a certain combinationof store group and prepack article. You can also plan stock (putaway) to bekept in the distribution center for replenishment purposes during a season. Theplanned quantities for the article concerned according to main characteristic andassortment can be sent to the MAP transaction using an interface, so that you cancheck whether the allocated quantities match the planned quantities.

The component list for a prepack article can be changed provided the Customizingsettings allow this. You can create new prepacks and include them in theallocation. You can also remove lots from the allocation. The transaction forprepack allocation planning enables you to trigger the creation of the vendorpurchase orders as follow-on documents for the allocation table. If you makechanges to the allocation table at a later date, the purchase orders will be changedautomatically to reflect these changes.

336 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 345: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Prepack

Exercise 24: Structured Articles

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a prepack

Business ExampleDue to an upcoming sports event, you plan to sell sneakers for men, which aredelivered to you in prepack quantities.

Task 1:Create sneakers for men as a generic article. Only maintain the Basic Data view.

1. The men's sneakers have the article number A5## and belongs to themerchandise category for athletics RF11111. As you want to carry the articlein several colors and sizes, you choose the article category generic articles.The article is a fashion article with the article type: Fashion Goods.

2. The system determines the colors and sizes of the article from thecharacteristics profile RFP04.

3. The men's sneakers are offered in the colors black and camel and in the sizes8.5 and 9. Create all the possible combinations of these colors and sizes.

4. EnterMen's sneakers Gr## as the article short text.

5. Save your article.

Task 2:Now create a prepack with which you want to order the shoes from your vendor ata later stage. You only maintain the Basic Data view for the prepack too.

1. The prepack has the article number LOT_## and also belongs to yourmerchandise category for athletics RF11111. The article is a fashion articlewith the article type Fashion.

Ensure you select the correct article category.

2. Your article description is Sneakers prepack Gr##.

3. Now allocate the components to the prepack. Create the components fromthe generic article variants A5##. Enter a quantity for every combination.The prepack should not contain more than 70 sneakers. Let the system checkthis and adjust the quantities if necessary.

4. Save your article.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 337

Page 346: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Solution 24: Structured ArticlesTask 1:Create sneakers for men as a generic article. Only maintain the Basic Data view.

1. The men's sneakers have the article number A5## and belongs to themerchandise category for athletics RF11111. As you want to carry the articlein several colors and sizes, you choose the article category generic articles.The article is a fashion article with the article type: Fashion Goods.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Create

b) Select the Basic Data view.

Article Number A5##

Article Type Fashion Goods

Merchandise Category RF11111

Article Category Generic article

c) Enter

2. The system determines the colors and sizes of the article from thecharacteristics profile RFP04.

a) Select characteristic profile RFP04 by double-clicking.

3. The men's sneakers are offered in the colors black and camel and in the sizes8.5 and 9. Create all the possible combinations of these colors and sizes.

a) Use the F4 Help to select the values black and camel, and the sizes 8.5and 9 from the Characteristic Value Assignment subscreen.

b) Confirm your entries by pressing Enter.

c) Press F3 to go to the generic article matrix.

d) Select all combinations.

e) Press F8 to go back to the Basic Data view of the article.

4. EnterMen's sneakers Gr## as the article short text.

a)

Article Short Text Men's sneakers Gr##

5. Save your article.

a) Article→ Save

Continued on next page

338 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 347: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Prepack

Task 2:Now create a prepack with which you want to order the shoes from your vendor ata later stage. You only maintain the Basic Data view for the prepack too.

1. The prepack has the article number LOT_## and also belongs to yourmerchandise category for athletics RF11111. The article is a fashion articlewith the article type Fashion.

Ensure you select the correct article category.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Data→Material→ Create

b) Select the Basic Data view.

Article Number LOT_##

Article Type Fashion Goods

Merchandise Category RF11111

Article Category Prepack

c) Enter

2. Your article description is Sneakers prepack Gr##.

a)

Description Sneakers prepack Gr##

3. Now allocate the components to the prepack. Create the components fromthe generic article variants A5##. Enter a quantity for every combination.The prepack should not contain more than 70 sneakers. Let the system checkthis and adjust the quantities if necessary.

a) Choose Components

Generic article A5##

Target total 70 pcs

b) Enter the quantities for the individual components and adjust them tothe target total if necessary.

4. Save your article.

a) F3: Article→ Save

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 339

Page 348: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the possible uses of the prepack� Describe the structure of a prepack� Create a prepack article for an existing generic article

Related Information

� For more information about quota scales and prepack allocation planning,see the SAP Help for SAP for Retail at help.sap.com.

340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 349: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

Lesson: Additionals

Lesson OverviewAdditionals support the presentation of an article in the sales floor. They can beused for all article categories.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the mostimportant parameters

� Assign additionals to an article

Business ExampleThe T-shirts are to be presented on the sales floor using special labeling.

Functions of the AdditionalsYou can assign additionals to your articles in order to support an effectivepresentation in sales and to support the logistics. Examples of additionals areprice tickets, security tickets, coat hangers and packing materials (particularly forprivate labels). You can use this function to, for example, arrange for the vendorto put price tickets on the goods you order.

Other services provided by the vendor, such as the ironing or prepacking of thegoods, can also be treated as additionals.

Figure 139: Additionals: Definition

Additionals are single articles that are created in a specific article type. Additionalsare assigned to individual articles during the article maintenance.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 341

Page 350: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Procedures are defined for additionals articles. These procedures control at whichevents (for example, create purchase order) the system should create data for theadditionals article, how that data is determined and how/where to provide it.

The data for the additionals is provided in IDoc (Intermediate Document) form.To prepare additionals IDocs for printing, you require an external program thatconverts the data into the relevant printer format.

Figure 140: Additionals: Functions

Information about listed articles can be transferred by means of assortment listIDocs. If additionals are assigned to an article, and the assortment list indicator isset for the procedure for additionals, the information about these additionals iscopied into the assortment list IDoc.

You can include material and handling costs of the additionals in the pricing of anarticle. So for example, you have the option of increasing the retail price by thecost of the sew-in labels, or to include the costs for attaching price tickets in thedistribution center in the price calculation of the assigned article.

The Additionals monitor provides an overview of the additionals documents thathave been generated by follow-up actions and their status'.

Changes made to master or movement data, for example, to an article or a retailprice, lead to change pointers being updated. You can use the change analysis totrigger the generation of additionals IDocs in the SAP system.

If the triggering event occurs, for example, when creating a purchase order, thesystem automatically determines the relevant additionals and processes the data ofthese additionals.

342 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 351: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

If necessary, you can also manually trigger the generation of additionals IDocs.The following are examples of cases in which you can use this option:

� You need a replacement for additionals that are lost or that can no longerbe used.

� You want to centrally print posters or stoppers as part of a promotion.

Settings for Additionals

Figure 141: Additionals: General Controls

In the general control for Retail master data, you define parameters that areimportant for different subfunctions in SAP Retail on client level.

In this Customizing view, you can activate the Additionals component.

Hint: If you do not want to generate any additionals, you should not setthe indicator, in order to improve the performance of the system.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 343

Page 352: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Figure 142: Additionals: Merchandise Category Control

You must create an article master for an additional. To this master record, youhave to assign an article type provided for additionals. The article type VKHM isprovided for this in the standard delivery.

Before you create an article master for an additional, you should define asuitable merchandise category structure for the additionals. For the additionalsmerchandise categories, you have to maintain the procedures for additionals thatare allowed in Customizing.

You determine the contents of the additionals IDoc with the logical message type.When choosing the merchandise categories, you should be aware of the fact thatthe same additionals IDoc is used for all the additionals in one merchandisecategory, due to the Customizing settings.

For each merchandise category, you can enter a procedure for additionals that isautomatically defaulted when you assign an additional to an article. In a furtherCustomizing view, you can limit the permitted procedures for additionals for eachmerchandise category for additionals.

You define how the system should determine the number. You have the followingoptions:

� The number is determined from the corresponding document or the stock.For example, in the case of a goods receipt, the number of labels to beprinted results from the goods receipt quantity.

� The number has a fixed value. In the case of shelf-edge labels, generally onlyone label is created.

344 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 353: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

When maintaining a message type in the additionals merchandise category, youdetermine the message type that is processed when messages from a delivery areedited for an additional.

Figure 143: Additionals: Procedure for Additionals

If you want to create a label for an article, you have to assign the additionalsarticle master as well as the corresponding procedure in the additional data view.The procedure for additionals first has to be defined in Customizing, and it mustcontain the following control settings:

In the Additional req. column, select whether an additional must be created forthe procedure for additionals. This should be the rule. However, you can also usea procedure for additionals to transfer texts entered as additional information, towhich no additionals are assigned. In this case, do not select the checkbox.

If you want to create additionals in the store, the necessary data is sent to the storein assortment list IDocs. For that purpose you need to select the Assortment listcheckbox in the corresponding procedure for additionals.

If additionals are to be created centrally, for example, in a distribution center, thedata changes made to an additional and to the article belonging to it (includingthe article conditions) are then grouped together and they trigger a data entryin a central additionals IDoc.

If the procedure for additionals can only be carried out in selected sites, enter acorresponding class with sites in the Class Type and Class fields

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 345

Page 354: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

As the result of certain events in the applications, for example, when creating apurchase order, the system automatically determines the relevant additionals andprocesses the data of these additionals. In the respective application, additionalsdocuments are updated and then processed in a follow-up action (for example,they are converted into additionals IDocs).

Depending on the application, you can control for which special parameters afollow-up action is triggered for the additional.

� In the case of purchase orders, you can differentiate according to thepurchase order category and purchase order type, as well as according to thereturns indicator. The system can also check whether the procedure foradditionals is assigned to the current vendor. This assignment ensures that avendor only executes tasks that he can actually execute. In the context ofvendor price labelling, only the vendor who can attach a price ticket to thegoods should receive the information about the corresponding additionals.

� In the case of goods movements, the movement type is used for control.� Using the delivery application, you can control the creation of additionals

IDocs for inbound deliveries (shipping notification) and rough goodsreceipts.

� For sales orders, sales document categories and the sales document typesare used in analysis. If the relevant indicator is set, the system can searchthe methods provided by the customer, in order to determine the internalprocedures for additionals.

If a procedure for additionals is to be valid for all parameter values, you can enteran asterisk (*) in the field. If, for example, a procedure for additionals should bevalid for document category F (purchase order) and all order types, enter * asthe value for the order type.

You can determine when the additionals IDoc is created using these follow-upactions:

� Create additionals IDoc immediately (when posting in the application)� Create a purchase order for additionals� Wait for an external additionals IDoc request� Control the update in RIS (Retail Information System) depending on the

application.

346 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 355: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

Consider the following to derive the required procedures for additionals:

� Which applications must respond to additionals? Is the information about theassortment list IDoc in stores sufficient? Should you affix additionals, forexample, sales price tickets, to goods in a distribution center yourself? Is adedicated additionals management required to order additionals?

� Should relevant changes be centrally evaluated for certain additionals? Thatcan, for example, be the case for the central printing of promotion posters.

� Should the sender be restricted by a plant class, since a goods receipt mayoccur during a two-step stock transfer between distribution centers in bothcenters, but the additional should only be applied in one of the two centers?

� Are additionals used to act as supplementary logistics services within theframework of the merchandise distribution?

Standard SettingsSeven procedures for additionals are delivered:

� The methods 0001 and 0002 refer to the additionals management.� Method 0003 shows how an additionals IDoc is created on the basis of

a goods receipt.� Method 0004 informs stores about additionals to which this procedure for

additionals is assigned.� Methods 0005 and 0006 exemplify how procedures for additionals can be set

as supplementary logistics services for procurement and delivery.� Method 0007 displays a setting for the sales order processing. The additionals

are determined from the referenced sales document for the delivery.

The methods act as copy templates for user-defined entries with "speaking"descriptions for the procedures for additionals. As soon as user-defined proceduresfor additionals are set up, the standard entries should be deleted.

The Class Type and Class fields are not filled in the standard delivery. No classesare delivered.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 347

Page 356: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

348 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 357: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

Exercise 25: Additionals

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Set up the procedures for additionals and assign them to a merchandise

category for additionals

Business ExampleYou have started carrying men's trousers in your assortment and you would like topromote the sale of these trousers with a suitable label during a summer festival.The label will be printed in the store and attached to the garment there too.

Task 1:The data for the labels is created centrally and transferred to the store by theassortment list. The labels are printed in the store on a separate printer. Anadditionals article must be specified.

1. In Customizing create a suitable additionals procedure T0## by copyingadditionals procedure 0004 (with all the entries that belong to it) andselecting the fields corresponding to the task.

The description for the additionals procedure is GR##, Print in store.

2. Now assign the procedure for additionals to the merchandise category PriceLabel.

3. How many copies are created for additionals of the merchandise categoryRT11120?

______________________________________________________

4. How can you control the number of additionals to be produced?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Task 2:Now use your additionals procedure to article R1TA01## and then test the datacreation by generating an assortment list.

1. Assign the sales price label RT311121 to the article R1TA01## as anadditional with the procedure for additionals T0##.

2. The article should have the following supplementary text on the label:SPECIAL OFFER FOR SUMMER FESTIVAL!

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 349

Page 358: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

3. Save the changes to your article.

4. Manually generate an assortment list for the customer/site R1## in theassortment list type F for the article R1TA01##. Ensure that the article isa generic article and that you also want to take into account the variantsin the assortment list.

5. In the additionals IDoc overview, check whether the data for the additional iscontained in the assortment lists IDoc.

350 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 359: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

Solution 25: AdditionalsTask 1:The data for the labels is created centrally and transferred to the store by theassortment list. The labels are printed in the store on a separate printer. Anadditionals article must be specified.

1. In Customizing create a suitable additionals procedure T0## by copyingadditionals procedure 0004 (with all the entries that belong to it) andselecting the fields corresponding to the task.

The description for the additionals procedure is GR##, Print in store.

a) IMG: Logistics - General → Additionals → Procedure forAdditionals

b) Select additionals procedure 0004, Edit → Copy As...

c) Overwrite 0004 with T0##, change description

d) Choose Enter.

e) Table View→ Save

2. Now assign the procedure for additionals to the merchandise category PriceLabel.

a) IMG: Logistics - General → Additionals → Procedure forAdditionals→ Allowed Procedure for Additionals per MerchandiseCategory

b) Select the row withMerchandise category RT11120 and Procedurefor additionals 0004, Edit → Copy As...

c) Overwrite Proc. for additional with T0##.

d) Choose Enter.

e) Table View→ Save

3. How many copies are created for additionals of the merchandise categoryRT11120?

______________________________________________________

a) IMG: Logistics - General→ Additionals → Attributes of theMerchandise Categories of Additionals

b) Select merchandise category RT11120.

c) Choose Details

d) Number control has the value [ ]. The number is determined fromthe document

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 351

Page 360: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

4. How can you control the number of additionals to be produced?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

a) The number is determined from the document/stock or it is fixed at 1.

Task 2:Now use your additionals procedure to article R1TA01## and then test the datacreation by generating an assortment list.

1. Assign the sales price label RT311121 to the article R1TA01## as anadditional with the procedure for additionals T0##.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Change

b) Select the Basic Data view.

c) Choose Additional data

d) On the Additionals tab:

Sales unit EA

Additionals RT311121

assigned procedure T0##

2. The article should have the following supplementary text on the label:SPECIAL OFFER FOR SUMMER FESTIVAL!

a) Press Change supplementary text and, for Texts in language EN, enter:Special Offer for Summer Festival.

3. Save the changes to your article.

a) Choose Enter and choose F3 to go back (green arrow).

b) Article→ Save

Continued on next page

352 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 361: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Additionals

4. Manually generate an assortment list for the customer/site R1## in theassortment list type F for the article R1TA01##. Ensure that the article isa generic article and that you also want to take into account the variantsin the assortment list.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Assortment/Listing→ Assortment List→Generate→ Manual Selection:

Sales Organization RG10

Distribution Channel R1

Customer No.-Plant R1##

Assortment List Type F

Article R1TA01##

b) Program→ Execute or F8

c) Consider Variants

5. In the additionals IDoc overview, check whether the data for the additional iscontained in the assortment lists IDoc.

a) Retailing: Sales→ Additionals→ Environment→ IDoc Overview

Created On Current datePartner Number R1##

b) Program→ Execute or F8

c) Double-click message type WBBDLD.

d) Double-click the last IDoc.

e) Expand the Data Records node.

f) Behind each segment E1WBB01, there is another segment E1WBB03and there is another segment E1WTADAL1 behind this segment too.The data for the additional of the relevant article can be found in thissegment.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 353

Page 362: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most

important parameters� Assign additionals to an article

354 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 363: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Create characteristics� Assign characteristic values to characteristics� Group characteristic values together� Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category� Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles� List the prerequisites for creating a generic article� Create a generic article with variants� Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article� Name the possible uses of the prepack� Describe the structure of a prepack� Create a prepack article for an existing generic article� Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most

important parameters� Assign additionals to an article

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 355

Page 364: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

356 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 365: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8Structured Articles

Unit OverviewThe unit describes how structured articles are displayed in SAP Retail, andexplains the inventory management options of structured articles in the logisticalprocess, as well as the special features of the full product and the empties article.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them� Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are� Create a full product with empties components

Unit ContentsLesson: Structured Articles .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Exercise 26: Full Products and Empties.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 357

Page 366: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Lesson: Structured Articles

Lesson OverviewIn this unit you learn how to create articles made up of several components, suchas sales sets and displays. You also learn how deposit articles are mapped in thesystem.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them� Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are� Create a full product with empties components

Business ExampleYou add beverages, which are sold in deposit bottles, to your assortment. To beable to manage such articles with the SAP system, you create a full product andassign the deposit bottles and empty cases components to this full product.

Types of Structured Articles

Figure 144: Structured Articles: Article Categories

Structured articles are made up of several different articles. You have to enter thecomponents as well as the quantities in which they appear in the structured articles.

358 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 367: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Structured Articles

The display is a quantity of single articles or variants of one or more genericarticles. A display is purchased as an individual article. Therefore, it has its ownarticle number, a purchase price and purchase price conditions. Displays are madeup by the manufacturer or vendor.

The Sales set is a quantity of single articles or variants of one or more genericarticles. It is sold as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number,a sales price and sales price conditions.

Purchasing sets are already in the form of a set when the articles are purchased,are managed as a set right through the supply chain, and are sold as a set or assingle articles. This means, for example, a wheelbarrow is ordered and posted,components (trough, frame and wheel) are delivered, which can be sold in thestore as a wheelbarrow (set) or as single articles.

A prepack is a quantity of variants of one or more generic articles. A prepackis purchased as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number, apurchase price and purchase price conditions. Unlike displays, the components inprepacks must belong to the same merchandise category as the prepack itself.

Structured Articles: Structure and Definition

� A structured article consists of several components. The componentsthemselves are also created as articles in the system

� Bills of material are used for structuring� Structured articles can be left in their structure in logistics or they can be

divided into individual components.

Further settings for structured articles can be found under the following menu pathin Customizing Logistics - General -> Material Master -> Retail-Specific Settings-> Settings for Structured Materials.

When you use bills of material for empties for a full product, the system checkswhether the BOM Usage indicator has been set in the basic data of the full product(in other words, whether there is a bill of material or whether one can be created).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 359

Page 368: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Figure 145: Structured Articles: Sales Set

As a rule, a sales set is a collection of separate articles for the purpose of defininga total sales price. The sales set articles can often be sold as separate articles.

From the purchasing point of view, sets can be considered as several articles.From a sales point of view, the sales set is to be considered as one article that hasa sales price and a tax code.

Sales set components can be considered as individual articles. They may belongto different merchandise categories and have different tax codes. The set itself,however, can only have one tax rate

Inventory is managed at component level, if the components can be soldseparately. It can also be carried out at set level. In Customizing, you candefine the Inventory Management split, that is define Inventory managment oncomponent or header level.

Another form is the price set: The set is only created by assigning a commonsales price. This is generally lower than the total of the components' sales priceswhich can basically all be sold individually. The components are not physicallycombined by means of packaging.

If sets and the articles contained in them are sold individually in the store (forexample, cases and a set of three cases), then you should carry the stock on theindividual article level (components). The component stock decreases as the setsare sold. Any profit losses incurred by the sale of the set are posted to a separateaccount (POS inbound).

360 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 369: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Structured Articles

Figure 146: Structured Articles: Display

A display is always a quantity of articles grouped together by the manufacturer orvendor, which may have a common purchasing price and are usually bought underthe same article number. The articles are usually presented in the same packaging.

It is not until the display reaches the stores that it is split up into its individualcomponents for sale to the consumer. Displays are used most often in promotions.Usually, they are not ordered directly by the stores, but are allocated to the storescentrally.

As a rule, inventory is managed in the store at individual component level, and inthe distribution center, it is managed for complete displays. You can determinein Customizing at which level the system should do the inventory split of thedisplay (usually the split to components is only defined for stores; inventory inDistribution Centers is carried at header level).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 361

Page 370: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Figure 147: Structured Articles: Prepacks

Figure 148: Structured Article in the Logistical Process

In this Customizing view, you can determine on which levels in the logistics chain(distribution center, store) .. and in which transactions you want to split the set,display and prepack bills of material for inventory management:

In purchase orders, the resolution is purely informative.

A split in the goods receipt means that, from this level, inventory is managed oncomponent level and the header article has no stock.

362 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 371: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Structured Articles

You can determine the split of the structured articles at the following levels:store/DC, distribution chain, individual sites and for individual structured articles.

Figure 149: Settings for Structured Articles Maintenance

Sets, displays, prepacks and empties are structured articles that consist of severalcomponents. In this case, you must specify not only the components, but also thequantities in which the components are contained in the structured article. Thisrelationship is shown in the bills of material.

The bill of material usage key defines the enterprise areas, in which a bill ofmaterial can be used (for example production, sales). It controls the processing inthe downstream work areas.

The item category controls the classification of the item in a bill of materialaccording to set criteria, such as the object reference (article master record) or theinventory management. This enables item-relevant data to be processed for thebill of material. You can for example control field selection, default values inbill of material maintenance or special system activities with the item categorythat you select.

For example, for an item category such as a stock item, you can maintain articledata which enables inventory management.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 363

Page 372: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Figure 150: Creating a Structured Article: Prepack Example

The respective articles are created with article category PREPACK.

The components are assigned to the prepack in the basic data. Here you need todetermine how many of each individual variant is assigned to the prepack. Youcan distribute the quantities of variants using value and quota scales.

EmptiesFull Products and Empties: Terms

� Full Product

� Real goods� Also referred to as articles with empties

� Empties Articles

� Packaging material� Also referred to as a deposit article

� Bill of Material for Empties

� Assignment of full products/empties articles in kind and quantity� Tied Empties Article

� Stock of �full� empties� Non-Tied Empties Article

� Stock of �empty� empties

364 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 373: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Structured Articles

An empties article is a form of returnable transport packaging or sales packagingthat is usually subject to a deposit. The empties article is assigned to a full product.

You can flag a full product by setting theWith bill of material for empties indicatorin the article master record when you are creating the basic data screen. Thebill of material for empties shows the relationship between a full product andan empties article:

The full product and the unit of measure together make up the BOM header. Theempties articles that you have assigned form the components.

The individual BOM components and the full product itself all have their ownarticle master record.

In the standard SAP Retail system, you create an empties article as a single articlewith the article type Empties and a full product as a single article too, with thearticle type Full products.

If you are listing a full product that is assigned an empties article, then the emptiesarticle will also automatically be listed.

Figure 151: Full Products and Empties Articles: Empties Processing

You can only move goods with tied empties when you have activated emptiesprocessing in Customizing.

When you activate the empties processing, stock fields that are necessary forupdating the tied empties stock are initialized.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 365

Page 374: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Discontinuing Structured ArticlesFeatures of Structured Article Discontinuation

� If a generic article is discontinued, all its variants must be discontinuedbeforehand

� You may discontinue a variant of a generic article.� Sales set, prepack, display:

� A bill of material can be either completely discontinued or� A bill of material can be discontinued without its components

� Empties articles can only be discontinued if they are not assigned to a fullproduct.

366 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 375: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Structured Articles

Exercise 26: Full Products and Empties

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a full product with the copy function.� Assign empties components, such as deposit bottles and empty cases, to a

full product.

Business ExampleYou add Cola to your beverages assortment. To do this, you create a full productand assign the deposit bottle and empty case components to this full product.

Task 1:Create an article master record for your full product. You use the copy functionto do this.

1. Use article 311240 (water) as a template and so as a data source. The newarticle (target article) should receive the article number A6##.

2. Copy the underlying article data.

Task 2:After the new article A6## is created, you change the description to Cola andassign the empties.

1. The full product Cola can be sold in individual bottles and in cases of 24bottles. Create the empties components in question for the particular unit ofmeasure. Note that a full product case consists of 24 bottles and an emptycase. Use the article 311223 as a deposit bottle, use the article 311222 asan empty case. Save the entries you have made. Note: to assign emptiescomponents to several units of measure, the article must be saved and thencalled again every time a unit of measure is maintained.

2. Which components and quantities are assigned to the unit of measure case inthe Empties BOM? ________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Which components and component quantities are assignedto the unit of measure each in the Empties BOM?________________________________________________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 367

Page 376: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Solution 26: Full Products and EmptiesTask 1:Create an article master record for your full product. You use the copy functionto do this.

1. Use article 311240 (water) as a template and so as a data source. The newarticle (target article) should receive the article number A6##.

a) Retailing: Master Data→Material Data→Material→ Copy

b)

Source article - article number 311240

Target Article - article number A6##

2. Copy the underlying article data.

a) Select Underlying Material Data.

Execute (F8)

Exit from the message text by choosing the Back arrow. You go backto the Copy Article entry screen.

Task 2:After the new article A6## is created, you change the description to Cola andassign the empties.

1. The full product Cola can be sold in individual bottles and in cases of 24bottles. Create the empties components in question for the particular unit ofmeasure. Note that a full product case consists of 24 bottles and an emptycase. Use the article 311223 as a deposit bottle, use the article 311222 as

Continued on next page

368 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 377: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Structured Articles

an empty case. Save the entries you have made. Note: to assign emptiescomponents to several units of measure, the article must be saved and thencalled again every time a unit of measure is maintained.

a) On the Copy Article entry screen, click on the target article number andchoose Change Article.

Or:

Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Change andspecify the new article number.

Select the Basic Data view and choose Enter .

In the Basic Data view, choose the Components button.

b) On the Change Empties BOM entry screen, enter CSE (for case) as theUnit of Measure and choose Enter.

In the Component Overview for component 311222 (empties), enter 1as the quantity and choose Enter.

Enter the Component quantity 24 for the component 311223 (depositbottle), and choose Enter.

Choose the Back arrow.

Save

Repeat the solution given in 2-2 to maintain the unit of measure EA(each), since only one bill of material can be created in a transaction.

On the Change Empties BOM entry screen, enter EA as the Unitof Measure and choose Enter. In the Component Overview forcomponent 311223 (deposit bottle), enter 1 as the Component quantityand choose Enter.

Choose the Back arrow.

Save

2. Which components and quantities are assigned to the unit of measure case inthe Empties BOM? ________________________________________________________________________________________

a) Component 311223 (deposit bottle) with 24 bottles and component311222 (empty case) with one case.

3. Which components and component quantities are assignedto the unit of measure each in the Empties BOM?________________________________________________________________________________________

a) Component 311223 (deposit bottle) with one bottle.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 369

Page 378: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 8: Structured Articles IRT310

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them� Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are� Create a full product with empties components

370 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 379: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them� Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are� Create a full product with empties components

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 371

Page 380: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

372 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 381: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9Logistical Variants

Unit OverviewThis unit describes the scope of functionality of logistical variants in SAP Retailand explains how logistical variants are created.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail� Create logistical variants

Unit ContentsLesson: Logistical Variants .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Exercise 27: Logistical Variants ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 373

Page 382: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9: Logistical Variants IRT310

Lesson: Logistical Variants

Lesson OverviewNormally, the base unit of measure of an article is used for inventory managementand requirements planning. However, for some articles it can be necessary tosimultaneously carry stock in different units of measure, or to also plan an articlein different units of measure. In this case, you must create an article as logisticalvariants.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail� Create logistical variants

Business ExampleYou carry a new yoghurt in the assortment, which is to be carried in the unit ofmeasure Each and in the unit of measure Tray.

Logistical VariantsLogistical Variants: Definition

� A logistical variant is the variant of a generic article for a specific unit ofmeasure.

� Using logistical variants, you can carry separate stocks in various units ofmeasure for an article and the article can be procured in each of these unitsof measure.

374 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 383: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Logistical Variants

Figure 152: Logistical Variants: Example

You can assign different units of measure to each logistical variant's article masterrecord.

The following types of logistical variants exist:

The procurement variant is the variant for the unit of measure in which an articleis procured either from an internal or an external vendor. You can have severalprocurement variants for an article.

The sales variant is the variant for the unit of measure in which an article iscarried for sale to the consumers. Sales transactions reduce the inventory of thisunit of measure (variant). For each generic article there is only one sales variant.

This variant can be sold in various sizes of packaging that you have to enter intothe article master record of the variant as alternative units of measure.

Figure 153: Logistical Variants: Creating Variants

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 375

Page 384: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9: Logistical Variants IRT310

The merchandise category in which the logistical variant is created must have atleast one characteristic that has the logistical unit of measure feature (relevancyindicator = 3).

Characteristics for logistical units of measure can also be grouped undercharacteristic profiles and assigned to merchandise categories.

The logistical units of measure have to be defined in Customizing as units ofmeasure under General Settings - Check Units of Measurement.

Figure 154: Logistical Variants: Assigning Quantities

When creating the generic article you determine which unit of measure willbe used as the sales unit of measure. The procurement units of measure areautomatically assigned to the variants in this way.

If the indicator in the sales view is set to Sales UoM not variable, no other salesunit of measure can be assigned to the individual variants.

If the indicator has not been set, then you have to adjust the sales period in thelisting accordingly.

376 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 385: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Logistical Variants

Figure 155: Logistical Variants: Listing

By assigning the units of measure in the basic data view, the following validityperiods for listing and sales are assigned by the listing:

The variant with the sales unit of measure is listed for one day, so that the articlecannot be procured in this unit of measure. The sales period is defaulted from thevalidity period in the basic data.

The procurement variants are listed in connection with the validity period forexactly this time-frame so that the article can also be procured in these units ofmeasure. TThe sales period is set to only one day (current date) as these variantsand their units of measure were not defined as sales units of measure.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 377

Page 386: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9: Logistical Variants IRT310

378 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 387: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Logistical Variants

Exercise 27: Logistical Variants

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create additional units of measure as characteristics for logistical variants� Create logistical variants and list them accordingly

Business ExampleIn your stores and distribution centers you want to define the units of measure inwhich you order, deliver and sell yogurt.

To do this, you add the required characteristic Logistical units of measure to themerchandise category for dairy products.

Task 1:Create a characteristic for logistical units of measure with the characteristic nameLO_ME1##.

1. The characteristic description is Log. units of measure Gr##. The data typeisCharacter format and the number of characters should be limited to three.

2. Maintain the description in English: Logistical Variants Gr##.

3. You should be able to choose from all characteristic values that are availablein the check table.

4. Save the characteristic.

Task 2:In future, merchandise category RS14110 should use your characteristic for thelogistical units of measure. You use a characteristic profile for this.

1. Create characteristic profile PRO2## and assign your characteristicLO_ME1## to it.

Set the relevancy indicator so that the characteristics can be recognized aslogistical units of measure.

2. You then assign characteristic profile PRO2## to merchandise categoryRS14110.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 379

Page 388: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9: Logistical Variants IRT310

Task 3:Now create a new article yoghurt as a logistical variant. Select the Basic Dataand Listing views.

1. Your new article has the article number A7##. You want to create it in articletype FRIP (Perishables) and merchandise category RS14110. Logisticalvariants are always created as generic articles.

2. Choose your characteristic profile PRO2## by double-clicking it, and createthe yogurt for the following combinations of characteristic values of yourcharacteristic LO_ME1##:

Each XPack XLayer X

3. Enter �Yoghurt Gr##� as the article short text.

4. The unit of measure is calculated as follows:

EA = 1 EAPAC = 12 EA

LAY = 600 EA

Task 4:Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants.

1. Use the listing procedure that checks merchandise categories and assortmentgrades.

2. Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments.

Go to the individual variants. Why are the listing and sales periods different?

EA: ___________________

PAC: ___________________

LAY: ___________________

3. Save your logistical variants.

380 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 389: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Logistical Variants

Solution 27: Logistical VariantsTask 1:Create a characteristic for logistical units of measure with the characteristic nameLO_ME1##.

1. The characteristic description is Log. units of measure Gr##. The data typeisCharacter format and the number of characters should be limited to three.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Material Group Data→ Characteristics→ Characteristics Management.

Characteristic LO_ME1##

EnterDescription Log. units of measure Gr##

Data Type Character Format

Number of Chars 3

2. Maintain the description in English: Logistical Variants Gr##.

a) Descriptions tab

EN Logistical VariantsGr##

3. You should be able to choose from all characteristic values that are availablein the check table.

a) On the Values tab: click the Other Value Check button and choose thecheck table T006.

4. Save the characteristic.

a) Characteristic→ Save

Task 2:In future, merchandise category RS14110 should use your characteristic for thelogistical units of measure. You use a characteristic profile for this.

1. Create characteristic profile PRO2## and assign your characteristicLO_ME1## to it.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 381

Page 390: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9: Logistical Variants IRT310

Set the relevancy indicator so that the characteristics can be recognized aslogistical units of measure.

a) Retailing: Master data→ Material Group Data→ CharacteristicsProfile→ Create

Characteristic Profile PRO2##

Description Logistical Variants ##

b) Characteristics tab

Characteristic LO_ME1##

Relevancy Indicator 3

2. You then assign characteristic profile PRO2## to merchandise categoryRS14110.

a) Retailing: Master data→ Material Group Data→ MerchandiseCategory→ Change

b) Enter PRO2## in the Hierarchy assignment subscreen behindCharacteristic profile, and choose the Assign Profile button.

Task 3:Now create a new article yoghurt as a logistical variant. Select the Basic Dataand Listing views.

1. Your new article has the article number A7##. You want to create it in articletype FRIP (Perishables) and merchandise category RS14110. Logisticalvariants are always created as generic articles.

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Create

b) Select the Basic Data and Listing views.

Article Number A4##

Merchandise Category RS14110

Article Type Perishables

Article Category Generic article

c) Enter

2. Choose your characteristic profile PRO2## by double-clicking it, and createthe yogurt for the following combinations of characteristic values of yourcharacteristic LO_ME1##:

Continued on next page

382 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 391: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Logistical Variants

Each XPack XLayer X

a) Double-click the characteristics profile PRO2##.

b) Then select the F4 Help beside your characteristic LO_ME1##, andselect the values for Each, Pack and Layer in the Characteristic ValueAssignment subscreen.

c) Choose Enter.

d) To go to the generic article matrix, choose F3.

e) Select the combinations as follows:

Each XPack XLayer X

f) Choose F8 to go back to the Basic Data view of the article.

3. Enter �Yoghurt Gr##� as the article short text.

a) Article short text:Yoghurt Gr##

4. The unit of measure is calculated as follows:

EA = 1 EAPAC = 12 EA

LAY = 600 EA

a) Basic Data tab

b) In the Units of measure/EANs/dimensions subscreen:

EA = 1 EAPAC = 12 EA

LAY = 600 EA

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 383

Page 392: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit 9: Logistical Variants IRT310

Task 4:Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants.

1. Use the listing procedure that checks merchandise categories and assortmentgrades.

a) Listing tab

b) Listing Procedure: B1

c) Click the Execute Listing button.

d) Click the Assorts button.

e) Article→ Save

2. Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments.

Go to the individual variants. Why are the listing and sales periods different?

EA: ___________________

PAC: ___________________

LAY: ___________________

a) Retailing: Master Data→ Article Data→ Article→ Change

b) Select the Listing view.

c) Click the Validity Area button.

EA: The variant EA is listed for a day; the selling period depends onthe validity period. This means that the variant EA cannot be ordered,but it can be sold.

PAC: the variant PAC is listed as the validity period, but the sellingperiod is one day. This means that the variant PAC cannot be sold, butit can be ordered.

LAY: as PAC

3. Save your logistical variants.

a) Choose Save.

384 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 393: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Lesson: Logistical Variants

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail� Create logistical variants

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 385

Page 394: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Unit Summary IRT310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail� Create logistical variants

386 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 395: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

IRT310 Course Summary

Course SummaryYou should now be able to:

� Describe the organizational structures in SAP Retail and know where theseorganizational structures can be set up

� Maintain general Retail master data and configure it according to yourrequirements

� Describe the SAP Retail reference concept and use it according to yourrequirements

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 387

Page 396: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

Course Summary IRT310

388 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 397: IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail

FeedbackSAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure theaccuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections orsuggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in thecourse evaluation.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 389